JP6839831B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, the jackpot judgment is performed when the start condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is notified by the stop symbol of the special symbol, and the liquid crystal display device is displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Various effects of fortune-telling the jackpot determination result are realized by using a display device such as, and if the jackpot is reached, a jackpot game using the jackpot is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, while the jackpot game is being executed, the effect of opening these jackpots is performed by using the two jackpots (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The player can obtain a prize ball by inserting the game ball into the open large prize opening.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-29956

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
Based on the ball entry detection means (20a, 21a) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry ports (20, 21) provided in the game area (3) and the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection means. A determination means (81) for determining whether or not the game is correct, a first winning opening (30) provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member (32) provided in the game area and hindering or allowing acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation. The first winning detection means (30a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and the first winning detecting means located downstream of the first winning detecting means and detecting the winning. The first prize is obtained by the specific area (39) in which the game ball can be entered, the specific area entry detection means (39a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the opening / closing operation. A specific area opening / closing member (71) that hinders or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth to enter the specific area, and a winning opening that is provided in the game area and is different from the first winning opening. , A second winning opening (35) having a second opening / closing member (37) that hinders or allows acceptance of the game ball by the opening / closing operation, and a second that detects the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening. The operation of the winning detection means (35a), the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member can be controlled, and the winning / failing determination by the determining means determines that the winning is won. In this case, the hit game executing means (81) capable of executing the hit game for opening and closing the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member, and the gaming state after the hit game. Te, the first gaming state (low probability state), and the second gaming state (high probability state), being capable of performing one game state of the plurality of game conditions including, the specific region ball entrance Based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the specific area by the detection means, the game state control means (81) capable of setting the game state after the hit game to the second game state. The winning game executing means (81) includes a notification means (91) capable of executing notification of game information related to the game, and the winning game executing means (81) is the first winning opening or the second winning game in one winning game. It is possible to execute a round game in which one of the winning openings is opened a plurality of times, and the notification means (91) is a round in which the specific area entry detecting means detects the entry of the game ball into the specific area. In the game, a ball entry suggestion notification (FIGS. 84 and 86: V passage suggestion effect) is performed to indicate that the game ball has entered the specific area. Instead, it is a round game after the round game in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected, and the second opening / closing member of the second winning opening is controlled to be opened by the hit game executing means. A gaming machine (1), characterized in that, in a round game to be played, the second winning detection means executes the winning suggestion notification based on the detection of winning.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the game machine frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged view of the 1st grand prize apparatus and the 2nd grand prize apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of the 1st prize winning apparatus. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the frame relay board side of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing of the table stored in the main ROM. It is explanatory drawing of the storage area provided in the main RAM. It is explanatory drawing of the table stored in the sub ROM. It is explanatory drawing of the storage area provided in the sub RAM. It is explanatory drawing of various random numbers used in a game machine. It is explanatory drawing of the determination table T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a mismatch notification process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is the first figure which shows the structure of each round game. It is the 2nd figure which shows the structure of each round game. It is a 3rd figure which shows the structure of each round game. It is a 1st time chart which showed the operation of a special electric accessory and the like. It is a second time chart which showed the operation of a special electric accessory and the like. It is a 3rd time chart which showed the operation of a special electric accessory and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the receive interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-determination information storage area 94c. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the scenario information determination process. It is a figure which shows the scenario information determination table T75. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the zone effect pattern determination process. It is a figure which shows the zone effect pattern determination table T106. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the time saving effect change processing. It is a figure which shows the high accuracy time saving production rush lottery table T107. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the fanning effect lottery process. It is a figure which shows the fanning production lottery table T108. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect pattern determination process. It is a figure which shows the core production pattern determination table T100. It is explanatory drawing of each table for deciding the chance up. It is explanatory drawing of each table for deciding the chance up. It is a flowchart which shows the opening effect pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the round whole production decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM clear notification stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the movable accessory production. It is a figure which shows the variation production example (no chance up) of only the core production. It is a figure which shows the example of the fluctuation production based on the core production and chance up. It is a figure which shows the example of the button effect and the example of the movable accessory effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a zone production. It is a figure which shows the example of the pending change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the pseudo continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display effect of the jackpot game state and the time saving state corresponding to each special figure stop symbol data. It is a figure which shows an example of a battle victory production. It is a figure which shows an example of a battle defeat production. It is a figure which shows an example of a battle revival production. It is a figure which shows the example of the low accuracy time saving production. It is a figure which shows the example of the high accuracy time saving production. It is a figure which shows the example of the fanning effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the right-handed notification effect. It is a figure which shows the production example at the time of a big hit game in the game machine of the comparative example. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6B for the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of 2nd Embodiment. It is 1st flowchart of the variation pattern selection process of 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a 3rd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the flow of the variation effect of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of Game Machine Based on FIGS. 1 to 6, the structure of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine frame 50. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 2. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the first prize-winning device 31 and the second prize-winning device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The game machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50 (see FIGS. 1 to 3). The game machine frame 50 includes an outer frame 51, an inner frame 52, and a front frame 53 (see FIG. 2). The outer frame (base frame portion) 51 is a vertically rectangular frame body that forms an outer frame portion of the game machine. The inner frame 52 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged inside the outer frame 51, and the game board 2 is attached to the hollow region. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52, and protects the game board 2.

The game machine frame 50 is provided with a hinge portion 54 on the left end side (see FIG. 2). The front frame 53 is rotatably configured with respect to each of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 by the hinge portion 54, and the inner frame 52 is rotated with respect to each of the outer frame 51 and the front frame 53. It is configured to be movable. An opening 53a is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and a transparent glass plate 55 is attached to the opening 53a. The player can visually recognize the game area 3 of the game board 2 through the portion (window part) of the glass plate 55 located inside the opening 53a. A transparent synthetic resin plate or the like may be used instead of the glass plate 55. That is, the window portion may be such that the game area 3 can be visually recognized from the front.

The front frame 53 includes a base frame 56, an upper decorative unit 200, a left decorative unit 210, a right decorative unit 220, and an operation mechanism unit 230. The base frame 56 is a frame body on which the upper decorative unit 200, the left decorative unit 210, the right decorative unit 220, and the operation mechanism unit 230 are detachably attached on the front surface side (front side). As shown in FIG. 1, speakers 67 are provided on the upper left and upper right of the base frame 56, and a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 for storing game balls is provided on the lower left of the base frame 56. It is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a hitting ball launching mechanism 57 for launching a game ball into a game area 3 described later is provided at the lower end of the base frame 56. The ball striking plate 61 is attached to the base frame 56, but is integrated (unitized) with the operation mechanism unit 230. The operation mechanism unit 230 may be attached to the inner frame 52 and face the front surface of the game machine frame 50.

The upper decorative unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the base frame 56, and when all the units (upper decorative unit 200, left decorative unit 210, right decorative unit 220, operation mechanism unit 230) are attached to the base frame 56, the uppermost decorative unit 200 is arranged. Protrude forward. That is, the upper decorative unit 200 has the longest dimension in the front-rear direction among all the units attached to the base frame 56. As a result, the front frame 53 can give a larger impact than the conventional front frame because the upper decorative unit 200 is emphasized. The upper decorative unit 200 is configured to be independently removable by a screw (not shown) regardless of how the left decorative unit 210 and the right decorative unit 220 are attached to the base frame 56. As described above, since the upper decorative unit 200 can be attached and detached without being linked (engaged) with other members, it can be easily replaced in the event of a failure or inspection. The upper decorative unit 200 includes a frame movable body 600 and a frame lamp 66. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the upper decorative unit 200. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state (FIG. 1) stored inside the upper decorative unit 200 to an exposed state (FIG. 76) protruding upward from the upper decorative unit 200. The frame lamp 66 is provided on the front wall portion of the upper decorative unit 200 so as to be particularly conspicuous from the player or the like, and the first light emitting unit 341, the second light emitting unit 342, the third light emitting unit 343, and the third light emitting unit 343 are provided from the left side to the right side. The four light emitting units 344 are arranged in order. The light emitting units 341, 342, 343, 344 emit light as the game progresses. The first light emitting unit 341 has an "O" shape when viewed from the front, the second light emitting unit 342 has an "A" shape when viewed from the front, and the third light emitting unit 343 has an "R" shape when viewed from the front. , The fourth light emitting unit 344 has an "O" shape when viewed from the front. The light emitting units 341, 342, 343, 344 cause the upper decorative unit 200 to emit light as a series of meaningful characters consisting of "OARO". Here, "OARO" means the model name logo of the game machine 1. The shape of the light emitting unit 341, 342, 343, 344 can be any shape other than "OARO".

The left decorative unit 210 is arranged on the left side of the base frame 56 and includes a left decorative member 211. The right side decoration unit 220 is arranged on the right side of the base frame 56, and includes a right side decoration member 221 and a sword member 222. The sword member 222 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses.

The operation mechanism unit 230 is arranged below the base frame 56, and includes a handle 60, a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62, an effect button 63, and a select button (cross key) 68. The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the operation mechanism unit 230, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is arranged on the left side of the handle 60, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 and the select button (cross key) 68 are arranged on the upper side of the operation mechanism unit 230, and are operated by the player at the time of the effect to be executed as the game progresses.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 2 is usually variable with a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. Winning device (electric chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, normal winning opening 27, and out It includes a mouth 16 and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), a hold image display area in which the hold image groups 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold image display area. It has a hold digestion image display area on which the hold digestion image 9C is displayed.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. The middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. Each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "8". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction can be exemplified. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "decorative symbol variation effect", or simply "variation effect".

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) is performed by controlling a light emitter such as a lamp (LED) provided in the game area 3 outside the display screen 7a in a predetermined manner instead of displaying it on the display screen 7a (4th symbol). For example, the special symbol may be turned on when it is fluctuating, turned off when it is stopped, the first special symbol is blue, and the second special symbol is red). This identification display (fourth symbol) is always recognizable to the player, and is provided so as not to be hidden when, for example, an accessory is operated. By providing such an identification display (fourth symbol), the player can properly judge the current game situation.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image group 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and the reserved image group 9B according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area for displaying. By displaying the reserved image groups 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of stored memories can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The hold digestion image 9C is an effect image corresponding to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and the hold digestion image display area is the hold digestion image 9C for displaying the hold digestion image 9C. Includes display area. By displaying the reserved digestion image 9C, it can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion through which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion through which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion to flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11. A board movable body 15 in a retracted state is arranged on the upper part of the center decorative body 10.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 7). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 is required when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. This is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The result of this jackpot lottery is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, and when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. , The special symbol corresponding to the big hit lottery result is confirmed and displayed after the stop, and the lottery result is notified to the player. In addition, the image display device 7 plays a symbol matching game in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit. To.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it refers to a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42 (FIG. 6), which will be described later, displays fluctuations such as blinking of the ordinary symbol. After the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and then confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first large winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and is attached to the game board 2 by the pedestal 13. The first large winning device 31 includes a first large winning opening (first special winning opening) 30, a V region 39, and a V opening / closing member 71 (FIGS. 3 and 4). The first large winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation in the front. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIGS. 5 and 7). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. Further, 18 shown in FIG. 4 is provided above the V region (specific region) 39 (substantially directly above the V opening / closing member 71) to indicate (suggest) that there is a V region (specific region) 39. This is a V area (specific area) display unit. As shown in FIG. 4, the V region (specific region) display unit 18 is formed in a star shape and is provided on the surface of the game board 2 by being printed or affixed (seal). The V region (specific region) display unit 18 does not have to be star-shaped, and its position may be near the V region (specific region) 39.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is attached to the game board 2 by the pedestal 14. The second major winning device 36 includes a second major winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 (FIGS. 3, 4, and 5). The second large winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, blade member) 37 that hinders or allows the acceptance of the game ball by the opening / closing operation in the front. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIGS. 5 and 7). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The ordinary winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. It should be noted that a plurality of ordinary winning openings 27 may be provided. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the first prize-winning device 31. The first grand prize device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a first grand prize opening sensor 30a. A V opening / closing member 71 and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state) may be configured.

FIG. 5A shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of allowing the game ball to pass through the V region 39 (first state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the first special winning opening 30 passes through the V region 39 after passing through the first large winning opening sensor 30a. The route of this game ball is called the "first route". FIG. 5B shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of hindering the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 (second state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the first special winning opening 30 passes through the first large winning opening sensor 30a and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 to be non-V. Pass through region 70. The route of this game ball is called a "second route". In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operating port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

5 (A) and 5 (B) show the route through which the winning game ball passes through the second large winning opening 35. A second large winning opening sensor 35a is arranged in this passage path, and the second large winning opening sensor 35a detects the winning of a game ball into the second large winning opening 35. The second prize-winning device 36 does not have a V region as a probabilistic operation port inside. That is, the second prize-winning device 36 has only a non-V region inside. The second prize-winning device 36 may have a V region inside. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a second prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the second prize-winning device 36. The second large winning device discharge sensor is provided downstream of the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the second large winning opening sensor 35a.

FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (a special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), the first big winning opening 30 or the opening pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as stopped is used. A special game (big hit game) that opens the second big prize opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. The lost symbol is not a specific special symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined variation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 11). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 11) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 11) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in each of the present embodiments is four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The special figure hold indicator 43 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an assist for opening the second starting port 21 with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. The game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. It should be noted that the normal loss symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 11) as the normal figure hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the frame relay board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80, a sub control board 90, a frame relay board 99, an image control board 100, a lamp control board 107, a voice control board 106, and a payout control board 110. There is. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81, an input / output circuit 87, and a RAM clear switch 89 (FIG. 7). The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

The RAM clear switch 89 is configured to erase (clear) game information related to a game such as a game state and unpaid prize balls from the main RAM 84 by operating the RAM clear switch 89. The RAM clear switch 89 is exposed from a protective cover (main board case) (not shown) that protects the main control board 80. Therefore, the operation can be performed without removing the protective cover from the main control board 80. Since the RAM clear switch 89 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the game machine 1, the player facing the front side cannot operate the RAM clear switch 89. On the other hand, the hall manager can operate the RAM clear switch 89 by opening the front frame 53 and the inner frame 52 of the game machine 1 from the outer frame 51. As described above, the RAM clear switch 89 is arranged at a position that cannot be operated by the player and at a position that can be operated by the hall manager.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. Examples thereof include a sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, the card unit 135, the front frame opening switch 58, and the inner frame opening switch 59 are connected to the payout control board 110 via the launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 is connected. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The front frame opening switch 58 detects the opening of the front frame 53. When the front frame 53 is opened, a signal output from the front frame opening switch 58 (a signal indicating the “ON” state of the front frame opening switch 58) is input to the main control board 80 via the payout control board 110. Further, it is input from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. The inner frame opening switch 59 detects the opening of the inner frame 52. When the inner frame 52 is opened, a signal output from the inner frame opening switch 59 (a signal indicating the “ON” state of the inner frame opening switch 59) is input to the main control board 80 via the payout control board 110. Further, it is input from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 8, the sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the frame relay board 99 (FIG. 9) are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106 to control the speaker 67. The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the panel movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the panel movable body 15 (FIG. 3) based on the command received from the main control board 80. The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the center decorative body 10. The board movable body 15 is abbreviated to include the central portion of the display screen 7a after being unfolded from the stored state (FIG. 3) which is compactly folded and stored at the peripheral portion (here, the upper portion) of the display screen 7a. It is configured so that it can be displaced to the exposed state that is exposed in front of the entire area.

As shown in FIG. 9, the frame relay board 99 is provided with an effect button detection switch 63a, a select button detection switch 68a, a touch sensor 321 and an accessory drive motor 641 via an input / output circuit 96, and a photo. The sensor 531 is connected. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the frame relay board 99. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 68 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the select button detection switch 68a to the sub control board 90 via the frame relay board 99. The touch sensor 321 is provided on the front frame 53, and when the human body comes into contact with the touch sensor 321, a detection signal is output to the sub control board 90 via the frame relay board 99. The accessory driving motor 641 drives the frame movable body 600 (FIG. 1). When a drive signal is output from the sub-control board 90 to the accessory driving motor 641 via the frame relay board 99, the accessory driving motor 641 is driven. The photo sensor 531 detects the position of the frame movable body 600. The detection signal of the photo sensor 531 is output to the sub control board 90 via the frame relay board 99.

The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the board movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the board movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. .. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute lamp lighting control based on a command. Further, the frame movable body 600 may be connected to the lamp control board 107 and its operation may be controlled by the lamp control board 107. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a variation pattern determination table T6, and an electric chew. The opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage area 86. There is. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, a RAM clear notification command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and a RAM. The clear notification flag, power off flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, retry end flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, a round counter (not shown), and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a first random value group such as a jackpot random number corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is a first storage area for storing random value groups corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation, respectively. Two storage areas, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 is a first storage area and a second storage area for storing ordinary symbol random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 includes a jackpot type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which frame movable body drive data for driving the frame movable body 600 is set. Is provided.

The sub ROM 93 includes a stop symbol pattern determination table T51, an opening effect pattern determination table T52, a round effect pattern determination table T53, an ending effect pattern determination table T54, a customer waiting effect pattern determination table T55, and a scenario information determination table. Movable with T75, a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T81, a V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T82, a core effect pattern determination table T100, a display effect chance up determination table T101, and a sound effect chance up determination table T102. Character production chance up decision table T103, lamp production chance up decision table T104, button production chance up decision table T105, zone production pattern determination table T106, high accuracy time saving production rush lottery table T107, fanning production chance up lottery table T108 and is stored. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect start command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a flag set area 94e. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, a RAM clear notification command, and the like are stored. In the effect start command set area 94b, commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, the voice control board 106, and the frame relay board 99 are set in the sub control main process (described later). It is an area (output buffer), and a variable effect start command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a time reduction counter, a rotation speed counter, and the like are set. The flag set area 94e is an area in which a flag used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a time saving effect change flag, a fanning effect flag, a V passing flag, and a game state flag (low accuracy time saving flag, high accuracy). Time saving flag), time saving effect flag (low accuracy time saving effect flag, high accuracy time saving effect flag), etc. are set.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 14A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 14B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored. The second special figure is stored in the reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires "chance-up random numbers", "scenario random numbers", "zone random numbers", "highly accurate time-saving effect rush random numbers", and "fanning effect decision random numbers" at the timing described later. It is configured to do. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “scenario random number” is a random number used to determine a change scenario of the hold display, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "zone random number" is a random number used to determine the zone effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random number" determines whether or not to enter the high-accuracy time-saving effect in the high-accuracy time-saving state (latent probability variation state) after the "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (Fig. 16) described later. It is a random number used to determine, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The "random number for determining the fanning effect" is the high-accuracy time-shortening state (latent probability variation state) and the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (Fig. FIG. 16) It is a random number used to determine whether or not to perform the fanning effect in the later low probability time saving state, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. "Scenario random numbers", "zone random numbers", "high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random numbers", and "fan effect decision random numbers" are acquired based on the pre-judgment command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. Random numbers. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 15A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 15B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 15C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 15D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 15A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be determined to be "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 15B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 15C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). The table referenced to do so. In FIG. 15 (D), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 16, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the lottery, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 59", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "60 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". When the jackpot type random value is "64 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 6". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 7". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" regardless of the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is shown that the stop symbol (special figure stop symbol) of the special figure 2 is determined to be the "big hit symbol 1". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 17, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 18, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state, and the jackpot determination table T1 determines that the jackpot is "big hit", and the jackpot type determination table T5 determines that the jackpot is "16 RV passing jackpot". When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Also, when it comes to super reach, it is also decided whether or not there is a pseudo-ream. Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, super reach is carried out progressively through normal reach. The details of the pseudo-ren will be described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the player reaches a reach when it is determined to be “lost”, the number of reserved balls “1 to 2” is set at both the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. The probability of normal reach is lower and the probability of super reach is higher in the case than when the number of reserved balls is "3-4". That is, when the reach is determined when the player is "missing", the normal reach appearance rate is higher and the super reach appearance rate is lower when the number of reserved balls is large. Further, this tendency is more remarkable in the second starting port 21 than in the first starting port 20.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the reach is reached when it is determined that the ball is “lost”, the number of reserved balls “1 to 2” is set at both the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the normal reach is longer in the case than when the number of reserved balls is "3-4". Similarly, if the player does not reach when it is determined to be "lost", the number of reserved balls "3" is higher when the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2" at both the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the loss without reach is longer than that of "~ 4". That is, the fluctuation time of the normal reach and the loss without reach when it is determined to be "loss" is shorter when the number of reserved balls is large. Here, comparing the fluctuation times of the corresponding normal reach and non-reach loss of the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, the first starting port 20 is compared in both the non-time saving state (FIG. 17) and the time saving state (FIG. 18). The second starting port 21 is shorter than that (P7> P24, P11> P28, P15> P32, P16> P33, P47> P64, P51> P68, P55> P72, P56> P73). Further, the fluctuation time of the normal reach and the loss without reach is the same in the non-time saving state (FIG. 17) and the time saving state (FIG. 18) at the first starting port 20 (P7 = P47, P11 = P51, P15). = P55, P16 = P56), but at the second starting port 21, the non-time saving state (FIG. 17) is longer than the time saving state (FIG. 18) (P24> P64, P28> P68, P32> P72). , P33> P73).

With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is large (when the number is equal to or more than a predetermined number) in the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, the fluctuation time is shortened and the reserved number is quickly consumed. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the overflow of the hold, and the playability is improved. Further, when it is determined to be "lost", the fluctuation time of the second starting port 21 is relatively shorter than that of the first starting port 20, and the fluctuation time of the second starting port 21 is relatively shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. It has become shorter. That is, the second starting port 21 has a higher value than the first starting port 20. As a result, the fluctuation time related to the loss of the second starting port 21 can be shortened, and the next big hit can be quickly aimed at, particularly in a short time state, and the game playability is improved. Although the fluctuation time of the first starting port 20 is the same in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, the non-time saving state may be made longer than the time saving state according to the second starting port 21. Good.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 19A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 19B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 16). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 20A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "16H", or "17H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and the special symbol stop symbol data is " At the time of "13H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". FIG. 20B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for 0.1 seconds and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 16). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 21 (A), when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "16H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 35", and the special symbol stop symbol data is "17H". , It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be the “open pattern 36”. FIG. 21B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, the opening pattern 34, the opening pattern 35, and the opening pattern 36. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the 10th, 12R In the eyes, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the maximum opening time is 31. The long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed for 5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the opening pattern 32 is opened at 8, 10R. In the eyes, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the maximum opening time is 31. The long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed for 5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd round, when the first winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the sixth winning is made. A long opening B of the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds is performed, and at the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the opening time is 0.1. The V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for a second, and when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30 at the 6th round, the V-opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. When the first prize is won, the long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 6th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and at the 4th round. , When the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the sixth prize is won, the opening time is up to 31.5 seconds. The long opening B of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed, and when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30 at the 8th round, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. When the first prize is won, the long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 35, at the 2nd, 4th, 8th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and at the 6th round. , When the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the sixth prize is won, the opening time is up to 31.5 seconds. The long opening B of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed, and at the 10th round, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. When the first prize is won, the long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 36, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. The jackpots, etc. in the game machine 1 will be explained. In the game machine 1, there are "big hit" and "loss" as a result of the big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 16H and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 20 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 21 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33 to In the case of 35) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a big hit to operate. Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 20 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 21 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 36), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 20: opening / closing member 32 and opening / closing member 37 opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 21: opening pattern 31 of the V opening / closing member 71), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 20: opening / closing member 32 and opening / closing member 37 opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, 4R and 8R, or 6R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 21: opening patterns 33, 34, 35 of the V opening / closing member 71), and the V in the first large winning opening 30 Passage to region 39 is easily possible.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 20: opening / closing member 32 and opening / closing member 37 opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 21: opening pattern 32 of the V opening / closing member 71), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 20: opening / closing member 32 and opening / closing member 37 opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 21: opening pattern 36 of the V opening / closing member 71), and the inside of the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 of the above.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 36 and opening patterns 33, 34, 35). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. That is, the game state after the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" is a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30. ), But the high probability is the latent state (latent probability change state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, all the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the jackpots scheduled to pass V. That is, when a big hit is won by a lottery based on a prize in the second starting port 21 which can be entered by executing the electric support control described later, the big hit scheduled to pass V is always obtained. In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply a "normal probability state (normal probability state). Non-high probability state, low probability state) ". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 15 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high-probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 17 and 18) in which the variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time reduction state. By doing, the time saving state is realized. Therefore, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of the normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 15 (C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 15 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 19). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 19). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this case), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low-probability state), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". The low accuracy high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low-base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time-saving state)". Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 3) by right-handed strike. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 3) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 44. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a power-on process (step S001). The power-on processing is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

After the power-on processing, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt processing (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates by adding 1 to the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 14 (A). When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the power-on processing (FIG. 22: step S001). In the power-on processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first enables the watchdog timer built in the main CPU 82 (step S011). The watchdog timer is for monitoring the operation of the main CPU 82, and outputs a reset signal to the main CPU 82 when a predetermined signal is not input from the main CPU 82 for a certain period of time. The reset signal resets the main CPU 82.

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 89 of the main control board 80 is being operated (step S012). This determination is made based on whether or not the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 89 is input to the main CPU 82. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 89 is operated, and when it is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 89 is not operated.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 89 is detected (step S012: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the RAM clear notification flag to ON (step S013). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 89 does not detect the operation (step S012: NO), the RAM clear notification flag is set to OFF (step S014). This RAM clear notification flag (FIG. 11) is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the game information stored in the main RAM 84 of the main control board 80, and is set to "ON" when the game information is erased. , "OFF" is set when the game information is not deleted. After setting the RAM clear notification flag ON / OFF, the game control microcomputer 81 sets to allow access to the main RAM 84 (step S015). With this setting, it becomes possible to access the main RAM 84, for example, write or read game information.

After setting the RAM access permission, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag is OFF (step S016). When the RAM clear notification flag is determined to be ON (step S016: NO), the process proceeds to step S021. When the RAM clear notification flag is determined to be OFF (step S016: YES), that is, when the game information is not erased, the game control microcomputer 81 calculates the checksum (step S017). The checksum is a value calculated to check the reliability of the data, and here, the data string of the game information stored in the main RAM 84 is regarded as a string of integer values and is obtained by the total. .. After the checksum is calculated, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the calculated checksum value as the checksum value in the data of the main RAM 84 at the time of power failure stored in step S2802 of the power failure monitoring process (FIG. 44) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S018). If they do not match (step S018: NO), the process proceeds to step S021. If they match (step S018: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the power off flag is ON (step S019). The power off flag is set to "ON" when a power off signal is input, and "OFF" when there is no power off signal input in the power off monitoring process (FIG. 24: step S108) described later. It is set. When the power off flag is OFF (step S019: NO), the process proceeds to step S021. When the power off flag is ON (step S019: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the work area of the main RAM 84 at the time of power recovery (step S020). In this setting, in addition to setting the power off flag to OFF, the power recovery information is read from the main ROM 83 of the main control board 80, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main RAM 84. The "during power recovery" here includes a state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, and a state in which the power is restored from the power failure or momentary power failure state.

In step S021, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the entire area of the main RAM 84. After clearing, the work area of the main RAM 84 is initially set (step S022). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the initial information read from the main ROM 83 in the work area of the main RAM 84. After the initial setting of the main RAM 84, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a RAM clear notification command (step S023). The game control microcomputer 81 creates a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub control board 90 that the main RAM 84 has been cleared and the initial settings have been made, and the game control microcomputer 81 creates a RAM clear notification command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a as transmission information. Set (remember). In the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the RAM clear, which will be described later, based on the input of the RAM clear notification command.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 22: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates a jackpot random number, a jackpot type random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (see FIG. 14A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 22) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (after the completion of the main side timer interrupt processing, the next main side timer interrupt. It is done both with (the period until the processing is started).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 7).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) and the power failure monitoring processing (step S108) are executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the power off monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process. In the output process, the commands and the like set in each of the above processes are output to the sub-control board 90.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 24: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 3 or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 14: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value is used as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 4 (upper limit value) or more (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 3 or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step S208). .. Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired. The value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are the label-TRND-A value, the label-TRND-AS value, and the label, respectively. -TRND-RC value, label-TRND-T1 value. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group (big hit random value, jackpot type random value, reach random value, fluctuation pattern random value) in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. It is stored in the storage area according to the current number of reserved balls. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 26) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 4 (upper limit value) or more (step). S211). The special figure 1 hold ball number is the number of the first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 4 or more (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is 3 or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step S213). .. Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 27) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 25: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 15) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 25: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 15) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIGS. 30 and 31) described later, but as another embodiment, it is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table for pre-judgment.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 25: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 16). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIGS. 30 and 31) described later, but as another embodiment, the jackpot type determination table T5 is used. May make a pre-judgment using a different jackpot type determination table for pre-judgment.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 25: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 18, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach presence / absence pre-judgment result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 32 and 33) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 25: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 15) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 25: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is set here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 24: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 25). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 25), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 30) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 15 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a normal symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is determined to be "missing". (See FIG. 15 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 15 (D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 15 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 15 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the hit determination (step S505) described above is "missing", the fluctuation display is stopped. (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 19A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state (see FIG. 19). After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511 (see FIG. 19). When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 24: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is divided into five stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4", "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (step S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (step S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), the mismatch notification process is performed (step S1309). The discrepancy notification process is executed when the number of game balls won in the big winning opening during the round game and the number of game balls discharged from the big winning device after winning do not match (when a discrepancy occurs) to eliminate the discrepancy. The retry operation of the V opening / closing member 71 and the mismatch notification for notifying the hole of the mismatch are performed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 29: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved) of the second starting port 21 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, various random value values stored in the location (fourth storage area) corresponding to the fourth reserved storage area 85b in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are cleared (step S1405). By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the leftmost reserved image of the reserved image group 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side. It is displayed as a pending digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images (middle left, middle right, right end) of the reserved image group 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are shifted to the left by one (see FIG. 3). .. As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (special figure 1 reserved) is "0" in the game control microcomputer 81. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, various random value values stored in the location (fourth storage area) corresponding to the fourth reserved storage area 85a in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the rightmost reserved image of the reserved image group 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side. It is displayed as a pending digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images (middle right, middle left, left end) of the reserved image group 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are shifted to the right by one (see FIG. 3). .. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to “2” (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the elapse of a predetermined standby time, sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene (step S1414), and performs this process. Finish. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 16) of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (V). It is easier to win the jackpot that is scheduled to pass.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 30: steps S1402, S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 15 (A)) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 15) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 16). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 16) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
32 and 33 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 30: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates with reference to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 17). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 17 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P1". "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 17). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 15B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 17). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected depends on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 17). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 33: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 17) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 18 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 18 ("P44". (Parts of "P46") are referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 24: step S109). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 29: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 32 and 33) (see FIGS. 17 and 18). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 30) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 29: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 30) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 20), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 21), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 20 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 35: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time saving counter in the low accuracy and high base state, and "160" is set in the time saving counter in the high accuracy and high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the probability change state, the probability change counter value, whether or not it is in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 35: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 29: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not the time to open the big winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 20) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 20) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221) and performs the mismatch determination process (step S2222). The “mismatch determination process” is a process of determining whether or not the number of game balls that have won the large prize opening during the round game and the number of game balls that are discharged from the large prize device after winning match. A discrepancy occurs when the game balls that have won the big prize opening are stuck inside the big prize device. The number of game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 is counted by the first large winning opening sensor 30a. The number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31 is calculated by a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown). The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and the game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a are counted. The number of game balls that have won the second large winning opening 35 is counted by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. The number of game balls discharged from the second prize-winning device 36 is calculated by a second prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown). The second large winning device discharge sensor is provided downstream of the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the game balls that have passed through the second large winning opening sensor 35a are counted.

When a mismatch is detected by the mismatch determination process (step S2223: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "5" (step S2225), and ends this process. As a result, in the next special operation process, the mismatch notification process described later is executed. The "mismatch notification process" is a process of performing a retry operation of the V opening / closing member 71 for resolving the mismatch and a mismatch notification for notifying the hall of the mismatch. The details of the mismatch notification process will be described later. In this way, when a mismatch is detected after the end of the round game, the mismatch notification process is executed before moving to the next round game.

When the mismatch is not detected by the mismatch determination process (step S2223: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is set to "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot", the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 38: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 21 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened in any of "short opening", "long opening A", and "long opening B". This is also because the short opening (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed when the first ball is won. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 21 (B)), and the V-opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And set the V validity period to 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 42). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is detected. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 40) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening A. When the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is the long opening B, it is a flag indicating that the sixth ball has been won in the first large winning opening 30. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening A (step S2521). If it is not the long open A (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is the long open B or the short open, the process proceeds to step S2530. On the other hand, in the case of the long open A (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 21 (B)), in the case of "long opening A", the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened when the second ball wins (here, the maximum is 31.5). This is to execute (seconds). Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally, the second ball is won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. However, in the discrepancy determination process described later, when a discrepancy in the number of incoming and outgoing balls occurs, a few seconds (1 second in this case) after the end of the round is set as the V valid period as the ball brushing period. That is, when the number of incoming / outgoing balls does not match in the mismatch determination process after the end of the round, the game control microcomputer 81 provides a mismatch notification processing period (retry operation) between the round and the next round. Period), a predetermined period is set as the V valid period. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2521, when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is not long opening A (step S2521: NO), that is, when long opening B or short opening, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the round. It is determined whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is the long opening B (step S2530). If it is not the long open B (step S2530: NO), that is, if it is the short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of the long open B (step S2530: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the sixth ball has been detected (step S2531). If the winning of the sixth ball is not detected (step S2531: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, when the winning of the sixth ball is detected (step S2531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2532). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 21 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened in the case of "long opening B" when the sixth ball is won. This is to execute (seconds). For the same reason as the long opening A, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is generally shorter than 31.5 seconds. Further, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long as in the long opening A, at least a part of the sixth and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 passes through the V region 39. It is configured as follows. In the V valid period setting process, similarly to step S2504, a few seconds (here, 1 second) during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2533), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process ends as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 38: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "160" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "160". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 160 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[Match notification processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the mismatch notification process (FIG. 29: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the retry end flag is ON (step S2401). The "retry end flag" means that the retry operation is executed after it is determined by the mismatch determination process (FIG. 38: step S2222) that the number of incoming / outgoing balls does not match, or the retry operation is unnecessary. It is a flag indicating that there is. When the retry end flag is ON (step S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. On the other hand, when the retry end flag is OFF (step S2401: NO), it is determined whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is operated during the round in which the number of incoming / outgoing balls does not match (step S2402). In the game control microcomputer 81, when the round is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71, that is, the round is the first round, the third round, the fifth round, the seventh round, the ninth round, the eleventh round, In the case of the 13th round and the 15th round, it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is not operating during the round. In the case of a round other than the above (opening round of the V opening / closing member 71), the determination of whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 has been activated is, for example, whether or not the first large winning opening 30 has won a prize during the round, V. It may be performed depending on whether or not the opening / closing member solenoid 73 is driven, whether or not the V validity period is set, and the like.

When the V opening / closing member 71 is not operating (step S2402: NO), the retry end flag is switched to ON (step S2412), and this process ends. That is, when the V opening / closing member 71 is not operating in the round, the V opening / closing member 71 is not retried. This is because if the number of balls entering and exiting does not match even though the V opening / closing member 71 is not operating during the round, the cause may be ball clogging (ball biting) of the V opening / closing member 71. Is low, and it is considered that the discrepancy cannot be resolved even if the V opening / closing member 71 is retried.

When the V opening / closing member 71 is operating (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2403). When the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2403: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening time (timing) of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached (step S2404). The determination as to whether or not the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is made is performed based on the opening pattern table for the retry operation of the V opening / closing member 71. Here, for example, as a retry operation of the V opening / closing member 71, an opening pattern table set to close for 1.4 seconds after the end of the round, then open for 0.8 seconds, and then close for 1 second is stored in the main ROM 83. Has been done. When the opening time (timing) of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the main processing after opening the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2405). On the other hand, if it is not the opening time (timing) of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2404: NO), this process ends as it is.

In step S2403, when the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2403: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing time (timing) of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached (step S2410). The determination as to whether or not the closing time of the V opening / closing member 71 is made is performed based on the above-mentioned opening pattern table. When the closing time (timing) of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the retry end flag to ON after closing the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2411). (Step S2412), this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is not the closing time (timing) of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2410: NO), the present process is finished as it is. When the V opening / closing member 71 is clogged with a ball by the retry operation of the V opening / closing member 71 in steps S2403 to S2405 and S241 to 2411, the ball clogging can be cleared.

In step S2401, when the retry end flag is ON (step S2401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the mismatch monitoring timer is ON (during mismatch notification) (step S2420). When the mismatch monitoring timer is not ON (during mismatch notification) (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the mismatch monitoring start time (timing) is set (step S2421). Judgment as to whether or not it is the mismatch notification start time is performed based on the mismatch notification pattern table. Here, for example, as a mismatch notification pattern, the mismatch notification is not performed for 3.2 seconds after the end of the round (mismatch monitoring timer is OFF), then the mismatch notification is performed for 1.2 seconds (mismatch monitoring timer ON), and then the mismatch notification is performed. A mismatch notification pattern table set to be stopped (mismatch monitoring timer OFF) is stored in the main ROM 83. When the mismatch notification start time (timing) of the mismatch monitoring timer is reached (step S2421: YES), the mismatch notification start process for turning on the mismatch monitoring timer is performed (step S2422), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the mismatch notification start time (timing) (step S2421: NO), this process ends.

In step S2420, when the mismatch monitoring timer is ON (during mismatch notification) (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the mismatch notification stop time (timing) is present (step S2430). The determination as to whether or not the mismatch notification stop time is performed is performed based on the above-mentioned mismatch notification pattern table. If it is not the mismatch notification stop time (timing) of the mismatch monitoring timer (step S2430: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the mismatch notification stop time (timing) is reached (step S2430: YES), the mismatch notification stop process for turning off the mismatch monitoring timer is performed (step S2431), and the retry end flag is switched to OFF (step S2432). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (step S2433). If the value of the round counter is not "0", that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted (step S2433: NO), the special action status is set to "4" to start the next round game. It is set (step S2437), and this process is completed. Setting this special operation status to "4" corresponds to canceling the mismatch that ends the mismatch notification processing period. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2433: YES), the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2434), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2434). S2435). Then, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2436), the special operation status is set to "4" (disagreement is released) (step S2437), and this process is completed.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 24: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). The detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is considered when the V opening / closing member 71 is controlled to the first state (FIG. 5 (A)). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504, S2523, S2532) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 39). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball number processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 24: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Power failure monitoring process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a power failure monitoring process (FIG. 24: step S108). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a power cutoff signal has been input (step S2801). If there is no input (step S2801: NO), this process ends. When there is an input (step S2801: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stores data related to the current state in the main RAM 84 (step S2802). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a checksum. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the power off flag (step S2803), and then performs loop processing without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

7. Configuration of each round game for each jackpot type The configuration of each round game for each jackpot type will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the configuration of each round game in the “16RV planned passing jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot”. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the configuration of each round game in "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpots 1 and 2". FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the configuration of each round game in “16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot 3” and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot 3”. 45 to 47 show a round display, a type of a large winning opening, an opening pattern of the large winning opening, an opening / closing time of the large winning opening, and an opening pattern of a V opening / closing member.

In the jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV in FIG. 45 (special figure stop symbol data 11H, 12H, 21H), the opening pattern 21 (FIG. 20) is used as the opening pattern of the large winning openings (first major winning opening 30 and second major winning opening 35). Is set, and an opening pattern 31 (FIG. 21) is set as an opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. As a result, in the 1st to 9th rounds, the 11th round, the 13th round, and the 15th round, the first large winning opening 30 is opened long, but the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened or opened. do not do. Therefore, in the above round, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 cannot pass through the V region 39. In the 10th and 12th rounds, the first large winning opening 30 is long-opened, and the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (long-opening A). Therefore, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 30 can pass through the V region 39. In the 14th and 16th rounds, the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened for a long time, so that the 2nd big winning opening 35 can win a prize.

In the 16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot (special figure stop symbol data 13H), the opening pattern 23 (FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and the opening pattern 32 (FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. 21) is set. As a result, in the 1st round to the 7th round, the 9th round, the 11th round to the 13th round, and the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened long, but the V opening / closing member 71 is opened short. Or, do not open. Therefore, in the above round, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 cannot pass through the V region 39. In the 8th and 10th rounds, the first large winning opening 30 is long-opened, and the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (long-opening A). Therefore, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 30 can pass through the V region 39. In the 14th round, the 2nd big prize opening 35 is opened short, so it is not possible to win the 2nd big winning opening 35, but in the 16th round, the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened long, so It is possible to win a prize in the second large winning opening 35.

In the 16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot 1 (special figure stop symbol data 14H) of FIG. 46, the opening pattern 22 (FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and the opening pattern 22 (FIG. 20) is opened as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The pattern 33 (FIG. 21) is set. As a result, in the first round, the third round to the fifth round, and the seventh to thirteenth rounds, the first large winning opening 30 is opened long, but the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened or opened. do not do. Therefore, in the above round, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 cannot pass through the V region 39. In the second and sixth rounds, the first large winning opening 30 is long-opened, and the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (second round: long-opening B, sixth round: long-opening A). Therefore, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 30 can pass through the V region 39. In the 14th and 16th rounds, the 2nd prize opening 35 is short-opened, so that the 2nd prize opening 35 cannot be won. In the 15th round, since the first big winning opening 30 is short-opened, it is not possible to make the first big winning opening 30 win a prize.

In the 16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot 2 (special figure stop symbol data 15H), the opening pattern 22 (FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and the opening pattern 34 (opening pattern 34) is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. FIG. 21) is set. As a result, in the 1st to 3rd rounds, the 5th to 7th rounds, and the 9th to 13th rounds, the first big winning opening 30 is opened long, but the V opening / closing member 71 is opened short. Or, do not open. Therefore, in the above round, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 cannot pass through the V region 39. In the 4th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening 30 is long-opened, and the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (4th round: long-opening B, 8th round: long-opening A). Therefore, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 30 can pass through the V region 39. The 14th to 16th rounds are the same as the 14th to 16th rounds of the 16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot 1.

In the 16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot 3 (special figure stop symbol data 16H) of FIG. 47, the opening pattern 22 (FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and the opening pattern 22 (FIG. 20) is opened as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. Pattern 35 (FIG. 21) is set. As a result, in the 1st to 5th rounds, the 7th to 9th rounds, and the 11th to 13th rounds, the first big winning opening 30 is opened long, but the V opening / closing member 71 is opened short. Or, do not open. Therefore, in the above round, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 cannot pass through the V region 39. In the 6th and 10th rounds, the first large winning opening 30 is long-opened, and the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (6th round: long-opening B, 10th round: long-opening A). Therefore, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 30 can pass through the V region 39. The 14th to 16th rounds are the same as the 14th to 16th rounds of the 16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot 1.

In the 16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot (special figure stop symbol data 17H), the opening pattern 22 (FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and the opening pattern 36 (opening pattern 36) as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. FIG. 21) is set. As a result, in the first round to the thirteenth round, the first large winning opening 30 is opened for a long time, but the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened or not opened. Therefore, in the above round, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 cannot pass through the V region 39. The 14th to 16th rounds are the same as the 14th to 16th rounds of the 16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot 1.

16R (substantial 13R) V passing jackpot 1-3 and 16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening (opening pattern 22), but the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know in what round the V opening / closing member 71 is opened. Also, it is difficult to understand what ball to open.

8. Explanation of operation of special electric accessory, etc. Using FIGS. 48 to 50, the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71, and the mismatch monitoring timer (here, these are collectively used) during one round game. The operation of (also called "special electric accessory, etc.") will be described. In FIG. 48, in the opening rounds (2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round) of the V opening / closing member 71, the first ball wins the first large winning opening 30. It is a time chart showing the operation of a special electric accessory, etc. FIG. 48 (A) shows a case where no mismatch has occurred in the mismatch determination process at the end of the round, and FIG. 48 (B) shows a case where a mismatch has occurred. In FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B), the operation / stop (open / close) of the first prize opening 30 and the ON / OFF of the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (opening / closing of the V opening / closing member) are shown, respectively. ), Handling when passing through the V area (V valid period / V invalid period), and ON / OFF of the mismatch monitoring timer (presence / absence of notification) are shown.

In the opening round of the V opening / closing member, regardless of the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (short opening, long opening A, or long opening B), after opening the first large winning opening 30, the first large winning opening 30 is reached. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is switched on for 0.1 seconds by winning the first ball. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 0.1 seconds. The V valid period is set at the same time as the opening of the V opening / closing member 71, and the V invalid period is switched to one second (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71. When the interval time (2 seconds) elapses after the first large winning opening 30 is closed, the round ends and the discrepancy determination process is executed. If no discrepancy has occurred, the next round is started, as shown in FIG. 48 (A). On the other hand, when a mismatch occurs, as shown in FIG. 48B, a mismatch notification processing period (retry operation period) is set between the end of the round and the next round. In the discrepancy notification process, a retry operation is executed in which the V opening / closing member 71 is closed for 1.4 seconds, then opened for 0.8 seconds, and then closed for 1 second. Further, the mismatch notification is performed for 1.2 seconds after the retry operation, and then the mismatch is released. This disagreement starts the next round. In other words, when a discrepancy occurs, it does not move to the next round until the discrepancy is resolved.

FIG. 49 shows that in the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is the long opening A (or long opening B), the second ball (or the sixth ball) is placed in the first large winning opening 30. It is a time chart showing the operation of a special electric accessory when a prize is won. Similar to FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B), FIG. 49 (A) shows a case where a mismatch does not occur in the mismatch determination process, and FIG. 49 (B) shows a case where a mismatch occurs. The case is shown. When the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is long opening A, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds by winning the second ball to the first large winning opening 30 after opening the first large winning opening 30. Will be done. The opening of the V opening / closing member 71 by winning the second ball is closed even if there is a remaining opening time at the end of the round. Since the maximum playing time of one round is 31.5 seconds, the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 due to the winning of the second ball is always closed at the end of the round. If the winning of the second ball occurs within the opening time of the winning of the first ball, the opening times overlap. When the second ball wins a prize at the interval time (2 seconds) after the closing of the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and the V valid period is set in the same manner. When the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is the long opening B, the same processing is performed by winning the sixth ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V valid period is set at the same time as the opening of the V opening / closing member 71, and if no mismatch occurs in the mismatch determination process at the end of the round, the V invalid period at the end of the round is as shown in FIG. 49 (A). Can be switched to. On the other hand, when a mismatch occurs in the mismatch determination process, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), the V invalid period is switched to when 1 second (ball brush period) elapses after the end of the round. That is, if no discrepancy has occurred, the ball brush period in the V effective region is not set.

FIG. 50 shows a special electric accessory in a round in which the V opening / closing member 71 does not open (1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, 15th round). It is a time chart showing the operation such as. Similar to FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B), FIG. 50 (A) shows a case where a mismatch does not occur in the mismatch determination process, and FIG. 50 (B) shows a case where a mismatch occurs. The case is shown. In the case of a round in which the V opening / closing member 71 does not open, the V opening / closing member 71 is not opened even if the first large winning opening 30 is won, and the V validity period is not set. Further, when a mismatch occurs in the mismatch determination process, the mismatch notification is performed during the mismatch notification processing period, but the retry operation is not performed. This is because in the round where the V opening / closing member 71 does not open, the V opening / closing member 71 does not open, so it is unlikely that the cause of the mismatch is ball clogging (ball biting) of the V opening / closing member 71, and the mismatch also occurs due to the retry operation. This is because it is thought that it will not be resolved.

In the rounds (14th round, 16th round) in which the second prize opening 35 is opened, the operation of the special electric accessory and the like is the same as in FIG. 50. That is, in the round in which the second special winning opening 35 is opened, if a mismatch occurs in the mismatch determination process, only the mismatch notification is performed during the mismatch notification processing period. In the present embodiment, the discrepancy determination process is performed even in the round in which the second major winning opening 35 is opened, but as another embodiment, the discrepancy determination process is performed in the round in which the second major winning opening 35 is opened. You may not have it.

9. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 8) will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 75. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the sub-control main process is read from the sub ROM 93 by the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 and executed. In step S4000, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs CPU initialization processing. In the CPU initialization process, various settings related to the sub CPU 92 and resets of counters and flags are performed. The counters and flags are stored in the counter set area 94d and the flag set area 94e of the sub RAM 94.

In step S4005, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the power off flag is ON and the contents of the sub RAM 94 are normal. If a negative determination is made here (step S4005: NO), the sub RAM 94 is initialized in step S4010, and the process proceeds to step S4015. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made (step S4005: YES), the process of step S4010 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S4015. That is, if the power off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the sub RAM 94 are not normal, the sub RAM 94 is initialized. On the other hand, if the contents of the sub RAM 94 are normal when the power off flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 does not initialize the sub RAM 94. Initializing the subRAM 94 resets various counters and flags.

In step S4015, the effect control microcomputer 91 disables interruption. In step S4020, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random numbers. Here, various random value values are updated. Random numbers include chance-up random numbers, scenario random numbers, zone random numbers, high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random numbers, and fanning effect determination random numbers (see FIG. 14). The random number value is added and updated one by one. The random number value is returned to "0" when it reaches the upper limit value. The initial value may be a number other than "0", or may be a number that is randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1.

In step S4025, the effect control microcomputer 91 allows interruption. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (step S4030) and the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S4015 and the process is repeated. That is, while the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process and the sub-side timer interrupt process try to interrupt at predetermined time intervals.

[Receive interrupt processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the reception interrupt process (FIG. 51: step S4030). In step S4100, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command (various commands transmitted from the main control board 80) has been received. This is a process of determining whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Here, if no command has been received (step S4100: NO), the reception interrupt process ends. On the other hand, when a command is received (step S4100: YES), the command received in step S4105 is stored in the sub RAM 94, and then the reception interrupt process is terminated.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing details of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 51: step S4035). In step S4300, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the reception command analysis process. The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the switch process. The details of the switch processing will be described later. In step S4310, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the command transmission process. In the command transmission process, various commands set in the output buffer of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands.

[Explanation of fluctuation production]
In the present embodiment, the effect performed during the change of the special symbol is also referred to as the change effect. The variation effect is realized based on the variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 66) described later. Variable production includes core production, display production chance up, sound production chance up, movable character production chance up, lamp production chance up, button production chance up, zone production, fanning production, high accuracy time reduction rush confirmation production, high accuracy time reduction. Includes production, low-accuracy time-saving production, and non-time-saving production. The high-probability time-saving effect is an effect that suggests a high-probability state, and more specifically, it is an effect that is executed in the case of a high-probability time-saving effect. The low-accuracy time-saving effect is basically an effect executed in the case of a low-accuracy time-saving state. However, the low-accuracy time-saving effect can be executed even in the case of a specific high-accuracy time-saving state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a specific high-accuracy time-saving state, there is a case where the low-accuracy time-saving effect shifts to the high-accuracy time-saving effect. The non-time saving effect is an effect executed in the non-time saving state. The fanning effect is an effect performed during the low-accuracy time-saving effect. The high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect is an effect that is executed as a connection when shifting from the low-accuracy time-saving effect to the high-accuracy time-saving effect. The high-accuracy time-saving effect, the low-accuracy time-saving effect, and the non-time-saving effect are effects in which the colors of the background images are different as described later, and these effects are not combined. The fluctuation of the special symbol that is being executed right now is also called "the fluctuation".

[Received command analysis processing]
54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 53: step 4300). In step S4400, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the RAM clear notification command has been received from the main control board 80. If it has been received (step S4400: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 starts the RAM clear notification in step S4405, sets the notification period of the RAM clear notification in the notification timer in step S4410, and steps S4415. Move to.

The RAM clear notification in step S4405 is a process realized by the effect control microcomputer 91 controlling the voice control board 106, and notifies a predetermined voice (for example, a voice such as “RAM cleared”) from the speaker 67. It is a process to do. As the RAM clear notification, in addition to the notification using the speaker 67, the notification by turning on the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107, and the image display device via the image control board 100. No. 7 includes a notification for displaying a predetermined image. Further, these notifications may be executed individually or in combination.

In step S4410, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a timer value corresponding to the notification period as a positive integer. The notification period may be a period during which the operator can sufficiently recognize the clearing of the RAM, but if a long period of time affects the business of the hall (for example, the game machine has passed the opening time). However, in consideration of the above-mentioned mode of notification), 1 to 300 sec is preferable, and 30 to 120 sec is more preferable.

In step S4415, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4415: YES), the process proceeds to step S4420. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the processes of steps S4420 to S4440 are not executed, and the process proceeds to step S4445.

In step S4420, the effect control microcomputer 91 rewrites the pre-determination information. Details of this rewriting process will be described later. In step S4425, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs scenario information determination processing. The scenario information will be described later. Next, in step S4430, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a zone effect pattern determination process. The zone production will be described later.

In step S4435, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the time saving effect change process. As the gaming state after the jackpot ends, there are a low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state and a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. When the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot" (special figure stop symbol data is 14H to 16H), after the jackpot game is completed, the accuracy is low despite the high accuracy and short game state. Perform time saving production. At this time, the transition from the low-accuracy time-saving effect to the high-accuracy time-saving effect is performed somewhere between 1 rotation and 100 rotations after the jackpot game is completed. Performing such a transition lottery is a time saving effect change process. The time saving effect change process will be described later.

In step S4440, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a fanning effect lottery process. The fanning production is a production that fuels the transition to the above-mentioned high-accuracy time-saving production. The fanning production is performed prior to the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving production. However, the fanning effect is not always executed prior to the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving effect (the fanning effect may not be executed and the process may shift to the high-accuracy time-saving effect), and the fanning effect is executed. However, it does not necessarily shift to high-accuracy time-saving production (there may be a gap). This fanning effect is when the jackpot type is "16R (real 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot" (special figure stop symbol data is 14H to 16H) and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (special figure stop). It can be executed when the symbol data is 17H).

In step S4445, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed in step S4450, and the process proceeds to step S4455. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4445: NO), the process proceeds to step S4455. The hold display process in step S4450 is a process of setting a command for displaying the hold image on the image display device 7 via the image control board 100. The reserved image at this time is selected based on the scenario information described above, if any.

In step S4455, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is executed in step S4460, and then the process proceeds to step S4465. The details of the variation effect start processing in step S4460 will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the process proceeds to step S4465.

In step S4465, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end process is executed in step S4470, and then the process proceeds to step S4475. The variable effect end process is a process for fixing and stopping the effect symbol. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the process proceeds to step S4475.

In step S4475, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is executed in step S4480, and then the process proceeds to step S4485. Details of the opening effect pattern determination process in step S4480 will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4475: NO), the process proceeds to step S4485.

In step S4485, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is executed in step S4490, and then the process proceeds to step S4495. The details of the round effect pattern determination process in step S4490 will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4485: NO), the process proceeds to step S4495.

In step S4495, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is executed in step S4500, and then the process proceeds to step S4505. The details of the ending effect pattern determination process in step S4500 will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4495: NO), the process proceeds to step S4505.

In step S4505, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4505: YES), the game status flag is set in step S4510, and the process proceeds to step S4515. The game state flag is provided in the flag set area 94e of the sub RAM 94. The game state flag is a general term for a low probability time reduction flag and a high probability time reduction flag. Therefore, in step S4510, the low-accuracy time-saving flag and the high-accuracy time-saving flag are set to ON or OFF, respectively, based on the game state designation command. Specifically, in the high-accuracy time-shortening game state, the high-accuracy time-saving flag is set to ON and the low-accuracy time-saving flag is set to OFF. Set the low accuracy time saving game flag to ON. In the normal gaming state, both the high-accuracy time-shortening game flag and the low-accuracy time-shortening game flag are turned off.

In step S4515, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a V passage command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4515: YES), the V passage flag is turned ON in step S4520, and then the process proceeds to step S4525. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4515: NO), the process proceeds to step S4525.

In step S4525, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a customer waiting standby command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is received here (step S4525: YES), the customer waiting effect processing is executed in step S4530, and then the process proceeds to step S4535. In the customer waiting effect processing in step S4530, a customer waiting effect command for executing a customer waiting demo effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect) on the image display device 7 is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4525: NO), the process proceeds to step S4535.

In step S4535, the RAM clear notification stop process is executed. This is a process for stopping the RAM clear notification started in step S4405. The details of the RAM clear notification stop processing will be described later. After the process of step S4535 is completed, the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Preliminary judgment information storage area]
FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a preliminary determination information storage area 94c. FIG. 56B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the predetermined information storage area 94c of FIG. 56A is shifted. The pre-determination information storage area 94c is provided in the sub-RAM 94 of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 (see FIG. 13). The pre-determination information storage area 94c is an area in which pre-determination information, pre-reading information, and effect change information based on a pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored. Here, the pre-judgment information includes jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, and the look-ahead information includes zone effect winning information and zone effect execution information, and is included in the effect change information. Includes high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information and fanning effect execution information. Hereinafter, the pre-judgment information, the look-ahead information, and the effect change information are collectively referred to as "pre-judgment information, etc."

In the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the first storage area and the second storage area for storing the pre-judgment information and the like corresponding to the first special figure hold for each of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold. 2nd storage area for storing the pre-judgment information etc. corresponding to the special figure hold of A fourth storage area is provided in which the pre-determination information and the like corresponding to the above are stored. In addition, the area is provided as an area corresponding to the fluctuation (current fluctuation).

The jackpot judgment information column that can store the jackpot judgment information, the jackpot type information column that can store the jackpot type information, and the fluctuation pattern information are stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, respectively. Possible fluctuation pattern information column, zone effect winning information column that can store zone effect winning information, zone effect execution information column that can store zone effect execution information, and high accuracy that can store high accuracy time saving effect entry information A time-saving effect rush information column and a fanning effect execution information column that can store fanning effect execution information are provided.

Based on the pre-determination command, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the result of the jackpot pre-determination, the result of the jackpot type pre-determination, and the result of the variation pattern pre-determination as the pre-determination information. In the process of rewriting the pre-judgment information in S4420 (FIG. 54) described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the above-mentioned pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command by the corresponding jackpot determination in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. It is stored in the information column, the jackpot type information column, and the fluctuation pattern information column. For example, when the fourth second special figure hold occurs, the result of the jackpot pre-judgment, the result of the jackpot type pre-judgment, and the result of the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment included in the pre-judgment command are displayed in the fourth of the special figure 2. It is stored in the jackpot judgment information column, the jackpot type information column, and the fluctuation pattern information column of the storage area.

That is, in the rewriting process of the pre-determination information in S4420 described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 has the result of the jackpot pre-determination included in the received pre-determination command, the result of the jackpot type pre-determination, and the result of the variation pattern pre-determination. Of the plurality of storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the special symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the hold corresponding to the received pre-judgment command, and the hold order of the hold (first or second). or 3rd or 4th), stored in the storage area according to the type of pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command (big hit pre-judgment result or big hit type judgment result or fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result). For example, a pre-judgment command is transmitted when the fourth second special figure is held, and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command is the jackpot pre-judgment result: "big hit" and the jackpot type pre-judgment result: "21H". , Fluctuation pattern pre-determination result: In the case of “P61”, these pre-determination results are stored as shown in FIG. 56 (A). Hereinafter, the jackpot pre-judgment result stored in the jackpot judgment information column of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c is also referred to as jackpot judgment information, and the jackpot type pre-judgment result stored in the jackpot type information column is also referred to as jackpot type information. The fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result stored in the fluctuation pattern information column is also called fluctuation pattern information.

In FIG. 56, the jackpot determination information representing the loss is indicated as “loss”, and the case where there is no information is indicated by “−”. It should be noted that these pre-determination information is shifted at the start of fluctuation as described later (see FIGS. 65: S5010, 56 (A) and 56 (B)). Specifically, the information in the second storage area is moved to the first storage area, the information in the third storage area is moved to the second storage area, and the information in the fourth storage area is moved to the third storage area. .. However, the pre-judgment information is not moved to the area. This is because in the fluctuation, the jackpot determination information, the jackpot type information, and the fluctuation pattern information are acquired by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

Then, based on these pre-determination information, pre-reading information (scenario information, zone effect winning information, and zone effect execution information) is determined and stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. Details of the scenario information, the zone effect winning information, and the zone effect execution information will be described later. These look-ahead information are shifted in the same manner as the pre-determination information (see FIG. 65: S5010, FIGS. 56A and 56B). At this time, the information in the first storage area is moved to the area. Then, the scenario information and the zone effect execution information are referred to in determining the variation effect pattern in the variation. The scenario information is referred to in the hold display process in step S4450 described above and the hold display shift process described later.

When the pre-determination command is received, the transition lottery from the low-accuracy time-saving effect to the high-accuracy time-saving effect is performed by the time-saving effect change process in step S4435. When the lottery for shifting to the high-accuracy time-saving effect is won, the high-accuracy time-saving effect entry information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. Further, in step S4440, a lottery for the fanning effect is performed. When the lottery for the fanning effect is won, the fanning effect execution information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. The high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information and the fanning effect execution information will be described later.

[Scenario information determination process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing details of the scenario information determination process (FIG. 54: step 4425). In step S4600, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold corresponding to the pre-determination command this time is the second special figure hold. If it is determined that the second special figure is on hold (step S4600: YES), the process proceeds to step S4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure is not on hold (step S4600: NO), that is, if the first special figure is on hold, the process proceeds to step S4610.

In step S4605, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is scenario information corresponding to the special figure 2. This is a process of determining whether or not the scenario information is already stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the special figure 2 and the area. If it is determined that there is scenario information corresponding to the special figure 2 (step S4605: YES), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the scenario information determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no scenario information corresponding to the special figure 2 (step S4605: NO), the process proceeds to step S4615.

In step S4610, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is scenario information corresponding to the special figure 1. This is a process of determining whether or not the scenario information is already stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the special figure 1 and the area. If it is determined that there is scenario information corresponding to the special figure 1 (step S4610: YES), the scenario information determination process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no scenario information corresponding to the special figure 1 (step S4610: NO), the process proceeds to step S4615.

In step S4615, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a reach loss from the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command. Whether or not it is a big hit is determined by referring to the big hit determination information. Whether or not the reach is lost is determined by using the fluctuation pattern information. When there are two fluctuation pattern information, one fluctuation pattern information indicates that there is reach, and the other fluctuation pattern information does not indicate that there is no reach. Therefore, when there are two fluctuation pattern information, the determination is made using one of the fluctuation pattern information. If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit or the reach is lost (step S4615: YES), the process proceeds to step S4620. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the jackpot nor the reach loss is performed (step S4615: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed and the scenario information determination processing is terminated.

In step S4620, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires a scenario random number. The scenario random number takes any value from "0" to "127". In step S4625, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the scenario information. The scenario information is determined based on the scenario random numbers using the scenario information determination table T75 described later. In step S4630, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the scenario information. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to this pre-judgment command. For example, if the pre-determination command this time is for the fourth second special figure hold occurrence, the scenario information is stored in the fourth storage area of special figure 2 (see FIG. 56 (A)).

[Scenario information determination table]
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a scenario information determination table T75. In the present embodiment, since the scenario information determination table T75 referred to differs depending on the number of reserved figures held when the special figure hold occurs, the four scenario information determination tables T75 corresponding to each of the first to fourth special figure hold occurrences Exists. In the following, two of these will be described as examples. FIG. 58 (A) shows the scenario information determination table T75A when the fourth special figure hold occurs, and FIG. 58 (B) shows the scenario information determination table T75B when the third special figure hold occurs. There is. The scenario information is determined based on the scenario random numbers, but the distribution is different between the time of reach loss and the time of big hit.

In the case of reach loss in the pre-judgment information when the fourth special figure hold occurs, the scenario information "401" is determined when the scenario random number is any of "0" to "9", and the scenario random number is "10" to "10". When any of "19", the scenario information "402" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "20" to "29", the scenario information "403" is determined, and the scenario random number is "30" to "30". When any of "39", the scenario information "404" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "40" to "49", the scenario information "405" is determined, and the scenario random number is "50" to "50". When any of "127", the scenario information "406" is determined (see FIG. 58 (A)).

In the case of a big hit in the pre-judgment information when the fourth special figure hold occurs, the scenario information "401" is determined when the scenario random number is any of "0" to "19", and the scenario random number is "20" to "20". When any of "39", the scenario information "402" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "40" to "59", the scenario information "403" is determined, and the scenario random number is "60" to "60". When any of "79", the scenario information "404" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "80" to "109", the scenario information "405" is determined, and the scenario random number is "110" to "110". When it is any of "127", the scenario information "406" is determined (see FIG. 58 (A)).

In the case of reach loss in the preliminary judgment information when the third special figure hold occurs, the scenario information "301" is determined when the scenario random number is any of "0" to "9", and the scenario random number is "10" to "10". When any of "19", the scenario information "302" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "20" to "29", the scenario information "303" is determined, and the scenario random number is "30" to "30". When any of "39", the scenario information "304" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "40" to "127", the scenario information "305" is determined. (See FIG. 58 (B)).

In the case of a big hit in the pre-judgment information when the third special figure hold occurs, the scenario information "301" is determined when the scenario random number is any of "0" to "19", and the scenario random number is "20" to "20". When any of "39", the scenario information "302" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "40" to "59", the scenario information "303" is determined, and the scenario random number is "60" to "60". When any of "79", the scenario information "304" is determined, and when the scenario random number is any of "80" to "127", the scenario information "305" is determined. (See FIG. 58 (B)).

Here, a display mode based on scenario information will be described. The scenario information is information regarding display changes of the reserved image groups 9A and 9B. Hereinafter, for each of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold, the hold images corresponding to the first to fourth special figure hold are also referred to as the first to fourth hold images, respectively. The number of reserved images of the displayed reserved image groups 9A and 9B is displayed on the first special figure reserved display 43a and the second special figure reserved display 43b. It corresponds to the number of stored items in the second special figure hold. For example, when the number of stored images of the first special figure hold is 4, the first to fourth reserved images of the special figure 1 are displayed, and when the number of stored images of the first special figure hold is 3, the special figure 1 is displayed. 1st to 3rd reserved images are displayed, and when the number of stored images of the 1st special figure reserved is 2, the 1st to 2nd reserved images of the special figure 1 are displayed and the number of stored images of the 1st special figure reserved. When is 1, the first reserved image of the special figure 1 is displayed, and when the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved is zero, the reserved image related to the special figure 1 is not displayed. The reserved image of the special figure 2 is also displayed in the same manner.

When the hold ball number command is transmitted with the occurrence of the special figure hold (winning to the starting port), the hold image is additionally displayed (step S4450). For example, when the first to third reserved images of special figure 2 are displayed and the number of reserved balls command corresponding to the fourth second special figure reserved is transmitted, the side of the third reserved image is displayed. The fourth reserved image is displayed in. In addition, the number of reserved images is reduced by one by starting the fluctuation based on the digestion of the special figure reservation (step S5005). For example, when the first second special figure hold is digested while the first to fourth hold images of the special figure 2 are displayed, the fourth hold image of the special figure 2 is deleted. In this case, the 4th 2nd special figure hold corresponding to the 4th hold image is changed every time the change is made (every time the hold is digested), and the 3rd 2nd special figure hold → 2 pieces. The second special figure hold of the eye → the first second special figure hold, and the associated hold image is also the third hold image → the second hold image → the first hold image. The variation is associated with a pending digestion image. In this way, the reserved image is shifted and displayed together with the shift of the special figure hold.

The reserved image of this embodiment can be set to white and red. When the red reserved image is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot is set to be higher than when the white reserved image is displayed. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that changes a white reserved image into a red reserved image. Displaying a hold image that was displayed in white in red is also called a hold change.

The scenario information is information indicating the color of the reserved image and the timing of the pending change. For example, in the scenario information "401", the fourth reserved image when the fourth special figure hold occurs turns red, and even if the shift process is performed thereafter, the third reserved image, the second reserved image, the first reserved image, and the corresponding It shows that all the pending digestion images corresponding to the fluctuations are red. For example, in the scenario information "403", the fourth reserved image when the fourth special figure reservation occurs is white, and the third reserved image of the next variation is also white. Then, the second reserved image turns red, and the first reserved image and the reserved digested image corresponding to the fluctuation become red.

In the scenario information "406" and "305", the white color remains unchanged. In this case, the hold display is the same as when the scenario information is not determined. Therefore, considering the case where the scenario information is determined, the rate of change to the red image on hold is about 39% in the case of reach loss when the fourth special figure hold occurs, and in the case of a big hit, It is about 86%. When the third special figure is held, it is about 31% in the case of reach loss and about 63% in the case of big hit. As a result, in the case of a jackpot, a pending change to the red image is more likely to occur than in the case of reach loss, and the pending change to the red image raises expectations for the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the scenario information is composed of white and red reserved images, but the blue reserved image, the green reserved image, the red reserved image, the golden reserved image, and the rainbow color are used according to the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Scenario information may be composed of three or more types of reserved images, such as a reserved image. Further, the scenario information may be configured by preparing a plurality of hold images having a shape different from that of the ball image, or by preparing a hold image imitating a character or the like.

[Zone production pattern determination process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the details of the zone effect pattern determination process (FIG. 54: step S4430). In step S4700, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is zone effect winning information. This is a process of determining whether or not there is zone effect winning information in the first to fourth storage areas of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, and the area. If it is determined that there is zone effect winning information (step S4700: YES), the zone effect pattern determination process ends without executing the subsequent processes. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no zone effect winning information (step S4700: NO), the process proceeds to step S4705.

In step S4705, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a reach loss from the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command. Whether or not it is a big hit is determined by referring to the big hit determination information. Whether or not the reach is lost is determined by using the fluctuation pattern information. When there are two fluctuation pattern information, one fluctuation pattern information indicates that there is reach, and the other fluctuation pattern information does not indicate that there is no reach. Therefore, when there are two fluctuation pattern information, the determination is made using one of the fluctuation pattern information. If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit or the reach is lost (step S4705: YES), the process proceeds to step S4710. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the jackpot nor the reach loss is performed (step S4705: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the zone effect pattern determination processing is terminated.

In step S4710, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires a zone random number. The zone random number takes any value of "0" to "127". In step S4715, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the zone effect pattern. The zone effect pattern is determined based on the zone random number using the zone effect pattern determination table T106 described later. In step S4720, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the zone effect winning information and the zone effect execution information. The zone effect winning information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pre-judgment command this time. For example, if the pre-judgment command this time is the one when the fourth second special figure hold occurs, the zone effect winning information is stored in the fourth storage area of special figure 2 (see FIG. 56 (A)). .. Further, the zone effect execution information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pre-determination command of this time and the storage area corresponding to the pre-determination command before this time. For example, if the pre-judgment command this time is the one when the fourth second special figure hold occurs, the zone effect execution information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the special figure 2 (FIG. 56 (A). )reference). In the figure, the state in which the zone effect execution information is stored is indicated by “○”. Further, for example, when the third second special figure is held, it is stored in the first to third storage areas of the special figure 2.

[Zone production pattern determination table]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a zone effect pattern determination table T106. The zone effect pattern (zone effect type) is determined based on the zone random number value, but the distribution is different depending on whether the determination result is reach loss or jackpot.

When the pre-judgment information is a big hit, when the zone random number value is any of "0" to "40", "no zone effect" is determined, and the zone random number value is any of "41" to "100". When the "zone effect A pattern" is determined, and when the zone random number value is any of "101" to "127", the "zone effect B pattern" is determined (see FIG. 60).

When the pre-judgment information is reach loss, "no zone effect" is determined when the zone random number value is any of "0" to "90", and the zone random number value is any of "91" to "120". When the "zone effect A pattern" is determined, and when the zone random number value is any of "121" to "127", the "zone effect B pattern" is determined (see FIG. 60).

When "no zone effect" is determined, the core effect described later is executed. When "no zone effect" is determined, the zone effect execution information column of the pre-determination information storage area 94c becomes "-". The color of the background image in the predetermined effect is different between the zone effect A based on the zone effect A pattern and the zone effect B based on the zone effect B pattern.

No zone effect is determined by about 32% in the case of a big hit, and by about 71% in the case of reach loss. Therefore, the jackpot can be expected regardless of whether the zone effect is based on either the zone effect A pattern or the zone effect B pattern. Further, the zone effect B pattern is determined at about 5% in the case of reach loss, whereas it is determined at about 21% in the case of a big hit. Therefore, when the zone effect based on the zone effect B pattern is executed, the jackpot can be further expected. In the present embodiment, there are two types of zone effect A and zone effect B, but three or more types of zone effect may be executed. Further, in addition to the effect of changing the background color, an effect of outputting a predetermined sound from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106, or an effect of lighting the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107. It is conceivable to do. Further, these effects may be executed individually or in combination.

[Time saving effect change processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the details of the time saving effect change process (FIG. 54: step S4435). In step S4800, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the time saving effect change flag is ON. When the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H), the time saving effect change flag is turned ON in the ending effect pattern determination process described later. If it is determined that the time saving effect change flag is ON (step S4800: YES), the process proceeds to step S4810. On the other hand, when the time saving effect change flag is not ON (step S4800: NO), that is, when the time saving effect change flag is OFF, the subsequent processing is not executed and the time saving effect changing process is terminated.

In step S4810, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery. The high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery is performed using the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery table T107, which will be described later, based on the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random value. In step S4815, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery has been won. If it is determined that the player has won the prize (step S4815: YES), the process proceeds to step S4820. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has not won (step S4815: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the time saving effect change processing is terminated.

In step S4820, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the highly accurate time-saving effect entry information. The high-accuracy time-saving effect entry information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current pre-determination command in the storage area corresponding to the high-accuracy time-saving effect entry column. For example, if the pre-judgment command this time is the one when the fourth second special figure hold occurs, the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information is stored in the fourth storage area of special figure 2 (FIG. 56 (A). )reference). In the figure, it is indicated by "○". In the high-accuracy time-short game state, the pre-determination command is not transmitted from the main control board 80 when the first special figure hold occurs (when the first start port 20 is won). Therefore, at this time, the time saving effect change process is not executed. Therefore, the pre-determination information storage area 94c is not set to the area for storing the high-accuracy time-saving rush information corresponding to the special figure 1 (see FIG. 56). Next, in step S4825, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the time saving effect change flag.

[Highly accurate time saving production rush lottery table]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery table T107. In the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery table T107, it is a hit when the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random value is "7", and the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random value is "0" to "6", "8" to "99". If it is one of the above, it will be lost. In other words, there is a 1/100 chance of winning the high-accuracy time-saving production rush lottery.

[Fan production lottery process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the details of the fanning effect lottery process (FIG. 54: step S4440). In step S4900, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fanning effect flag is ON. When the jackpot type is "16R (real 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot" (special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H), the fanning effect flag is "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (special figure When the stop symbol data is 17H), it is turned ON in the ending effect pattern determination process described later. If it is determined that the fanning effect flag is ON (step S4900: YES), the process proceeds to step S4905. On the other hand, when the fanning effect flag is not ON (step S4900: NO), that is, when the fanning effect flag is OFF, the subsequent processing is not executed and the fanning effect lottery process ends.

In step S4905, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. This is a process of determining whether or not there is high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information in the storage area corresponding to the current pre-determination command in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. For example, when the fourth second special figure is held, is there high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information in the storage area corresponding to the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information column of the fourth storage area of special figure 2? Judge whether or not.

If it is determined that there is high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information (step S4905: YES), the fanning effect flag is turned off in step S4910, and the process proceeds to step S4920. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information (step S4905: NO), the process proceeds to step S4915.

In step S4915, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not there is fanning effect execution information in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. This is a process of determining whether or not there is fanning effect execution information in the storage area corresponding to the pre-determination command prior to the current pre-determination command in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If it is determined that there is information for executing the fanning effect (step S4915: YES), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the fanning effect lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no fanning effect execution information (step S4915: NO), the process proceeds to step S4920.

In step S4920, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a fanning effect lottery. The fanning effect lottery is performed using the fanning effect lottery table T108, which will be described later, based on the fanning effect determination random number value. As will be described later, the fanning effect lottery table T108 includes a first fanning effect lottery table T108A and a second fanning effect lottery table T108B. Specifically, when the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information column of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c contains the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the second fanning effect lottery table T108B to fan the effect. The production lottery is executed, and when there is no high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information in the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information column of the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the production lottery is executed using the first fanning effect lottery table T108A.

In step S4925, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fan effect effect lottery has been won. If it is determined that the player has won the prize (step S4925: YES), the process proceeds to step S4930. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has not won (step S4925: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the fanning effect lottery process ends.

In step S4930, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the fanning effect execution information. The fanning effect execution information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the fanning effect execution information column, and is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pre-determination command prior to the current pre-determination command. For example, if the pre-judgment command this time is the one when the fourth second special figure hold occurs, the fanning effect execution information is stored in the first to third storage areas of the special figure 2 (FIG. 56 (A). )reference). In the figure, the case where there is information on the execution of the fanning effect is indicated by "○". In the high-accuracy time-short game state, the pre-determination command is not transmitted from the main control board 80 when the first special figure hold occurs (when the first start port 20 wins a prize). Therefore, at this time, the fanning effect lottery process is not executed. Therefore, in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, an area for storing the fanning effect execution information corresponding to the special figure 1 is not set (see FIG. 56).

[Fan production lottery table]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a fanning effect lottery table T108. The fanning effect lottery table T108 includes a first fanning effect lottery table T108A shown in FIG. 64 (A) and a second fanning effect lottery table T108B shown in FIG. 64 (B). In the first fanning effect lottery table T108A, it is a hit when the fanning effect determination random number value is "3", and the fanning effect determination random number value is any of "0" to "2", "4" to "99". It becomes a loss at one time. In other words, there is a 1/100 chance of winning the fanning production lottery. In the second fanning effect lottery table T108B, it is a hit when the fanning effect determination random number value is "0" to "89", and it is lost when the fanning effect determination random number value is any of "90" to "99". It becomes. In other words, there is a 9/10 chance of winning the fanning production lottery.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the details of the variation effect start process (FIG. 54: step S4460). In step S5000, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the fluctuation start command. This is a process of setting the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern information in the sub RAM 94. In step S5005, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the hold display shift process. This is a process of setting a command to the image control board 100 for controlling the reserved image in the image display device 7 in the sub RAM 94.

In step S5010, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the pre-determination information shift process. This is a process of shifting the information in the predetermined information storage area 94c. That is, the information in the first storage area (excluding the jackpot determination information, the jackpot type information, and the fluctuation pattern information) is shifted to the relevant area, the information in the second storage area is shifted to the first storage area, and the third storage is performed. The information of the area is shifted to the second storage area, and the information of the fourth storage area is shifted to the third storage area (see FIGS. 56A and 56B).

By the way, when the information corresponding to the special figure 2 is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the information corresponding to the special figure 1 is stored, the information corresponding to the special figure 1 is shifted. .. When the information corresponding to the special figure 2 is stored and the information corresponding to the special figure 1 is not stored, the information corresponding to the special figure 2 is shifted. When the information corresponding to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is stored, the information corresponding to the special figure 2 is preferentially shifted. That is, in the information shift in the predetermined information storage area 94c, the information corresponding to the special figure 2 has priority.

In step S5015, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the variation effect pattern determination process. The details of the variable effect pattern determination process will be described later. In step S5020, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized. In step S5025, the effect control microcomputer 91 decrements the time reduction counter. The time reduction counter is provided in the counter set area 94d, and 160 is set when the game state after the end of the big hit shifts to the high accuracy time reduction game state in the ending effect pattern determination process described later, and the low accuracy time reduction game state is set. When shifting to, 100 is set. Here, "1" is subtracted from the time reduction counter. When the time reduction counter becomes "0", the decrement is terminated.

Next, in step S5030, the effect control microcomputer 91 increments the rotation speed counter. The rotation speed counter is provided in the counter set area 94d, and 0 is set in the ending effect pattern determination process described later. Here, "1" is added to this rotation speed counter.

[Variation effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a variation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 65: step S5015). First, in step S5100 of the variation effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the core effect pattern determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern (effect program) for realizing the core effect based on the core effect pattern determination table T100. A description of the core effect pattern determination table T100 and an example of the core effect based on the core effect pattern will be described later.

In step S5105, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the display effect chance up determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 can determine the chance-up effect (also simply referred to as chance-up) of the display effect using the image display device 7 based on the chance-up random number and the display effect chance-up determination table T101. .. Chance up is a production to increase the expectation of a big hit for the player. The display effect chance up determination table T101 and an example of the display effect chance up will be described later.

In step S5110, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the sound effect chance up determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 can determine the chance increase of the sound effect using the speaker 67 based on the chance increase random number and the sound effect chance up determination table T102. The sound production chance-up determination table T102 and an example of sound production chance-up will be described later.

In step S5115, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the movable accessory effect effect chance up determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 can determine the chance increase of the movable character effect using the frame movable body 600 based on the chance up random number and the movable character effect effect chance up determination table T103. An example of the movable accessory production chance up determination table T103 and the movable accessory production pattern will be described later. In addition, in this embodiment, the chance of the movable character production using the frame movable body 600 is increased, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance of the movable character production using the board movable body 15 is increased. You may want to do it.

In step S5120, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the lamp effect chance up determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 can determine the chance increase of the lamp effect using the lamps (frame lamp 66, board lamp 5, etc.) based on the chance up random number and the lamp effect chance up determination table T104. .. An example of the lamp effect chance up determination table T104 and the lamp effect chance up will be described later.

In step S5125, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the button effect chance up determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 can determine the chance up of the button effect using the effect button 63 based on the chance up random number and the button effect chance up determination table T105. An example of the button effect chance up determination table T105 and the button effect pattern will be described later.

In step S5130, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the zone effect determination process. In this process, the effect control microcomputer 91 can determine the zone effect by referring to the zone effect execution information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the zone effect A as the zone effect when the zone effect A pattern is stored in the zone effect execution information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. Is determined, and when the zone effect B pattern is stored, it is determined to execute the zone effect B as the zone effect. The zone effect pattern determination table T106 and an example of the zone effect will be described later. The zone effect realized based on the zone effect pattern is one of the chances up.

In step S5131, it is determined whether or not the number of time reductions has reached 100, that is, whether or not the value of the rotation speed counter has reached 100. When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the number of time reductions has reached 100 (step S5131: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in step S5132 whether or not the time reduction effect change flag is ON. When the time saving effect change flag is ON (step S5132: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 is displayed in the high-accuracy time-saving effect entry information column corresponding to the area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c in step S5133. Accurate time saving effect Stores rush information.

In step S5134, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the time saving effect change flag. Next, in step S5135, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the fanning effect flag and shifts to the process of S5137.

On the other hand, when the time reduction number of times is not 100 times (step S5131: NO) and when the time reduction effect change flag is OFF (step S5132: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the process of step S5137. Transition.

In step S5137, the effect control microcomputer 91 is indicated by high-accuracy time-saving effect entry information (indicated by “◯” in FIG. 56) in the high-accuracy time-saving effect entry information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. Is stored) is determined.

When the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c is stored in the effect control microcomputer 91 (step S5137: YES), the next step is In step S5140, the execution of the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect is determined, and in step S5145, the low-accuracy time-saving effect flag is turned off, the high-accuracy time-saving effect flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S5199.

On the other hand, when the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c is not stored in the effect control microcomputer 91, the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information is not stored (step S5137: NO). Next, in step S5150, whether or not the fanning effect execution information (indicated by “◯” in FIG. 56) is stored in the fanning effect execution information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. To judge.

When the fanning effect execution information is stored in the fanning effect execution information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S5150: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 produces the fanning effect in step S5155. Is determined, and the process proceeds to step S5160. The effect control microcomputer 91 shifts to the process of step S5160 when the fanning effect execution information is not stored in the fanning effect execution information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S5150: NO). To do.

In step S5160, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the high-accuracy time-saving effect flag is ON. When the high-accuracy time-saving effect flag is ON (step S5160: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the execution of the high-accuracy time-saving effect in step S5165.

In the effect control microcomputer 91, when the execution of the zone effect is determined in step S5130 described above and the execution of the high-accuracy time-saving effect is determined in S5165, the variation effect related to the variation is performed only at the time of the variation start effect. In addition to executing the zone effect, it is decided to execute the high-accuracy time-saving effect in other effects.

In step S5170, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the time reduction count counter has become 0, that is, whether or not the time reduction state has ended. When the time reduction counter becomes 0 (step S5170: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the high-accuracy time reduction effect flag in step S5175, and proceeds to the process of step S5199. If the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S5170: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 shifts to the process of step S5199.

On the other hand, when the high-accuracy time-saving effect flag is not ON (step S5160: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in step S5180 whether or not the low-accuracy time-saving effect flag is ON. When the low-accuracy time-saving effect flag is ON (step S5180: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the execution of the low-accuracy time-saving effect in step S5185.

In the effect control microcomputer 91, when the execution of the zone effect is determined in S5130 described above and the execution of the low accuracy time saving effect is determined in S5185, the zone effect is produced only at the time of the variation start effect in the variation related effect. At the same time, it is decided to execute a low-accuracy time-saving effect in other effects (for example, super reach development effect, etc.).

In step S5190, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the time reduction count counter has become 0, that is, whether or not the time reduction state has ended. When the time reduction counter becomes 0 (step S5190: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the low accuracy time reduction effect flag in step S5195, and proceeds to the process of step S5199. If the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S5190: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 shifts to the process of step S5199.

On the other hand, when the low-accuracy time-saving effect flag is not ON (step S5180: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the execution of the non-time-saving effect in step S5197, and shifts to the process of step S5199.

In step S5199, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds the effect information (effect program) determined in step S5105-S5130, S5140, S5155, S5165, S5185, or step S5197 to the core effect pattern determined in S5100. Have one create a variable effect pattern. In this way, the variable effect pattern is determined. The effect based on this variable effect pattern includes, in addition to the core effect, the effect determined in step S5105-S5130, S5140, S5155, S5165, S5185, or step S5197. The effect control microcomputer 91 returns to the variable effect start process after the process of step S5199.

[Core production pattern determination table]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a core effect pattern determination table T100. In the core effect pattern determination table T100, the fluctuation pattern information, the fluctuation time, and the core effect pattern are associated with each other. The core production pattern of the present embodiment is roughly classified into "SP1", "SP2", "normal reach", or "loss without reach". Each of these core effect patterns includes display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67, lamps (frame lamp 66, board). This is a program for realizing a predetermined effect such as lighting control of a lamp 5 or the like).

"SP1" or "SP2" realizes a so-called super reach effect after the change start effect and reach formation effect, and then is changing through the super reach development effect and hit effect (or loss effect). This is a core effect pattern that realizes a symbol stop effect that fixedly stops the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. SP1 and SP2 differ in, for example, the length of the production time (variable time) and the production content such as the super reach production or the super reach development production.

The variation start effect is an effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a variable manner. The reach formation effect is an effect of forming a so-called reach state by temporarily stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8L and the effect symbol 8R with the same symbol. The super reach effect is an effect that develops from the reach formation effect (reach state), and is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character appears, a predetermined action is executed, or the background is switched. The super reach development production is a production that further develops from the super reach production. For example, a character different from the super reach production appears, an action different from the super reach production is executed, and a background different from the super reach production. It is a production that switches to. The winning effect is a lottery result of a special symbol, for example, by executing a predetermined action or switching the background while displaying a jackpot symbol array that temporarily stops and displays the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R with the same characters. Is a production that informs the player that is a big hit. In the loss effect, the player is informed that the effect is lost by, for example, executing a predetermined action while displaying the loss pattern array that temporarily stops and displays the effect symbols 8L and 8R and the effect symbol 8C with different characters. It is a production to notify. The symbol stop effect is an effect of confirming and displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed by the hit effect or the loss effect. Examples of these fluctuation start effects, reach formation effects, super reach effects, super reach development effects, hit effects, and symbol stop effects will be described later.

Further, "SP1" is divided into "SP1 (without pseudo)" which does not include the pseudo-continuous effect and "SP1 (with pseudo)" which includes the pseudo-continuous effect. Similarly, "SP2" is also classified into "SP2 (without pseudo)" which does not include the pseudo-continuous effect and "SP2 (with pseudo)" which includes the pseudo-continuous effect.

The pseudo continuous effect is an effect that is executed before the reach formation effect, and is an effect in which the "similar effect" is repeatedly executed. The "similar effect" includes, for example, an effect of fluctuating the effect symbol during the stop display or the temporary stop display. As the pseudo continuous effect, for example, after the variation start effect, a temporary stop display effect for temporarily stopping and displaying the effect symbol is executed, and then a pseudo change start effect for starting the effect symbol to change again is executed. Details of this pseudo-continuous production example will be described later. In this pseudo-continuous effect example, the symbol arrangement of the effect symbols at the time of the temporary stop display may be a random pattern (for example, "147") without a predetermined regularity, or has a predetermined regularity. It may be a chance eye (for example, "223", "357"), or may include a specific symbol (chance symbol). Further, at the time of the temporary stop display, only a part of the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed, or the effect symbols may be reduced and changed to make the effect appear to be a temporary stop display.

"Normal reach" is a core production pattern that realizes a reach formation effect and then realizes a symbol stop effect without going through a super reach effect. "Loss without reach" is a core production pattern that realizes a symbol stop effect without going through a reach formation effect. In the symbol stop effect in this case, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a fixed stop display in a lost symbol arrangement.

In S5100 of FIG. 66, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the core effect pattern determination table T100 of FIG. 67, for example, when the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main control board 80 is “P5”. , "SP1 (with pseudo)" having a fluctuation time of 45,000 [ms] is determined as the core effect pattern.

[Explanation of chance up table]
68 and 69 are diagrams for explaining an example of each table for determining the chance up. Specifically, FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the display effect chance up determination table T101, and FIG. 68 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of the sound effect chance up determination table T102. 68 (C) is a diagram for explaining an example of the movable accessory production chance up determination table T103. Further, FIG. 69 (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the lamp effect chance up determination table T104, and FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of the button effect chance up determination table T105. is there. In the remarks column shown on the right side of each table in FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C), 69 (A), and (B), the presence or absence of chance up is indicated, and in the case of "○". Indicates that it corresponds to chance up, and in the case of "x", it indicates that it does not correspond to chance up. A case that does not correspond to a chance up is also called a non-chance up.

[Display production chance up decision table]
The chances of display production are set for each core production pattern. Therefore, the display effect chance up determination table T101 is composed of a plurality of chance up tables associated with each core effect pattern, and when a predetermined core effect pattern is selected, the display effect chance up determination table T101 of the display effect chance up determination table T101. Among them, based on the chance-up table corresponding to the core effect pattern, the chance-up of the display effect corresponding to the core effect pattern can be determined.

FIG. 68A shows, as an example of the display effect chance up determination table T101, the display effect chance up determination table T101A when the core effect pattern is “SP1”. In this display effect chance up determination table T101A, the timing of chance up, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the type of chance up in the display effect, and the value of the chance up random number corresponding to the display effect (also called the chance up random number value). Is associated with. In the example of FIG. 68A, the timing of chance up is divided into timing 1 and timing 2, which are predetermined timings. The judgment result is divided into a big hit case and a lost case.

The types of chance-up corresponding to timing 1 are classified into three patterns of "armor: copper", "armor: silver", and "armor: gold". These represent the color of the armor of a predetermined character that appears at timing 1. In the case of "armor: copper color", it is as per the core production and corresponds to non-chance up (no chance up). In the case of "armor: silver" or "armor: gold", these display effects are realized instead of the core effects at timing 1, which corresponds to a chance increase.

Further, the types of chance-up corresponding to the timing 2 are classified into two patterns, "without cut-in effect" and "with cut-in effect". These represent whether the cut-in effect appears or the cut-in effect does not appear at the timing 2. In the case of "no cut-in effect", it is as per the core effect and corresponds to non-chance up. In the case of "with cut-in effect", the cut-in effect is realized at timing 2, which corresponds to an increase in chance.

In S5105 of FIG. 66, when the main effect pattern is “SP1”, the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the chance-up random number value is 100, the effect control microcomputer 91 is shown in FIG. Based on the display effect chance up determination table T101A shown in A), "armor: gold" is selected as the chance up at timing 1, and the cut-in effect is selected as the chance up at timing 2.

[Sound production chance up decision table]
The chances of sound production are set for each core production pattern. Therefore, the sound effect chance-up determination table T102 is composed of a plurality of chance-up tables associated with each core effect pattern, and when a predetermined core effect pattern is selected, the sound effect chance-up determination table T102 of the sound effect chance-up determination table T102. Among them, based on the chance-up table corresponding to the core effect pattern, the chance-up of the sound effect corresponding to the core effect pattern can be determined.

In FIG. 68B, as an example of the sound effect chance up determination table T102, the sound effect chance up determination table T102A when the core effect pattern is “SP1” is shown. In the sound production chance-up determination table T102A, the timing of the chance-up, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of chance-up in the sound production, and the chance-up random value corresponding to the sound production are associated with each other. In the example of FIG. 68 (B), the timing of the chance up is divided into the timing 3 which is a predetermined timing and the overall effect. The judgment result is divided into a big hit case and a lost case.

The types of chance-up corresponding to the timing 3 are classified into three patterns of a normal sound effect, a special sound effect 1, and a sound effect 2. These sound effects represent the sound effects output from the speaker 67 at the time of timing 3. The normal sound effect, the special sound effect 1, and the special sound effect 2 are different from each other. In the case of a normal sound effect, it is the same as the core production at timing 3, and corresponds to non-chance up. In the case of the special sound effect 1 or the special sound effect 2, these sound effects are realized instead of the core effects at the timing 3, which corresponds to an increase in chance.

The types of chance-ups that correspond to the overall production are divided into normal melodies and special melodies. These melodies represent the melody output from the speaker 67 in the overall production. In the case of a normal melody, it will be as the core production, and it corresponds to non-chance up. In the case of a special melody, the special melody is realized in the whole production instead of the core production, so it corresponds to an increase in chance.

In S5110 of FIG. 66, the effect control microcomputer 91 is at timing 3 when, for example, the core effect pattern is “SP1”, the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the chance-up random number value is 127. Select the special sound effect 2 as a chance-up for, and select a special melody as a chance-up for the overall production.

[Movable character production chance up decision table]
Opportunity up for movable accessory production is set for each core production pattern. Therefore, the movable accessory production chance-up determination table T103 is composed of a plurality of chance-up tables associated with each core production pattern, and when a predetermined core production pattern is selected, the movable character production chance-up is increased. In the determination table T103, the chance increase of the movable accessory effect corresponding to the core effect pattern can be determined based on the chance increase table corresponding to the core effect pattern.

FIG. 68 (C) shows a movable accessory effect effect chance up determination table T103A when the core effect pattern is “SP1” as an example of the movable accessory effect effect chance up determination table T103. This movable character production chance up determination table T103A corresponds to the timing of chance up, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the type of chance up in the movable character production, and the chance up random value corresponding to the movable character production. It is attached. In the example of FIG. 68 (C), the determination result is divided into a case of a big hit and a case of a loss. The types of chance up are "no movable accessory operation" in which the frame movable body 600 does not operate, "movable accessory operation A" in which the frame movable body 600 operates, and "movable accessory operation" in which the frame movable body 600 operates. It is divided into three patterns of "B". The operation of the frame movable body 600 is different between the movable accessory operation A and the movable accessory operation B. In the case of "no movable accessory operation", it corresponds to the main production and it corresponds to non-chance up. In the case of the movable accessory operation A or the movable accessory operation B, these movable accessory effects are realized at the timing 4, which corresponds to an increase in chance.

In S5115 of FIG. 66, the effect control microcomputer 91 is non-chance-up when, for example, the core effect pattern is "SP1", the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the chance-up random number value is 10. When "No movable accessory operation" is selected and the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot and the chance-up random number value is 101, the movable accessory operation B is selected as the chance-up at the timing 4.

[Lamp production chance up decision table]
The chances of lamp production are set for each core production pattern. Therefore, the lamp effect chance up determination table T104 is composed of a plurality of chance up tables associated with each core effect pattern, and when a predetermined core effect pattern is selected, the lamp effect chance up determination table T104 of the lamp effect chance up determination table T104. Among them, based on the chance-up table corresponding to the core effect pattern, the chance-up of the lamp effect corresponding to the core effect pattern can be determined.

In FIG. 69A, as an example of the lamp effect chance up determination table T104, the lamp effect chance up determination table T104A when the core effect pattern is “SP1” is shown. In the lamp effect chance up determination table T104A, the timing of chance up, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of chance up in the lamp effect, and the chance up random value corresponding to the lamp effect are associated with each other. In the example of FIG. 69 (A), the determination result is divided into a case of a big hit and a case of a loss. The types of chance-up are classified into three patterns: normal lighting, special lighting A, and special lighting B. These patterns represent lighting patterns of lamps (frame lamp 66, board lamp 5, etc.) in the overall effect. Normal lighting, special lighting A, and special lighting B are different from each other. In the case of normal lighting, it corresponds to the main production and it corresponds to non-chance up. In the case of special lighting A or special lighting B, these lamp effects are realized in the overall production instead of the core production, which corresponds to an increase in chance.

In S5120 of FIG. 66, when the main effect pattern is "SP1", the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the chance-up random number value is 100, the effect control microcomputer 91 is in the overall effect. When the normal lighting pattern is selected as the non-chance-up, the judgment result of the jackpot determination is the jackpot, and the chance-up random number value is 100, the special lighting A is selected as the chance-up in the overall production.

[Button production chance up decision table]
The chance up of button production is set for each core production pattern. Therefore, the button effect chance up determination table T105 is composed of a plurality of chance up tables associated with each core effect pattern, and when a predetermined core effect pattern is selected, the button effect chance up determination table T105 of the button effect chance up determination table T105. Among them, the chance up of the button effect corresponding to the core effect pattern can be determined based on the chance up table corresponding to the core effect pattern.

In FIG. 69B, as an example of the button effect chance up determination table T105, the button effect chance up determination table T105A when the core effect pattern is “SP1” is shown. In the button effect chance up determination table T105A, the timing of chance up, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of chance up in the button effect, and the chance up random value corresponding to the button effect are associated with each other. In the example of FIG. 69 (B), the determination result is divided into a case of a big hit and a case of a loss. The types of chance-ups are divided into two patterns: "without button effect" where the button effect is not executed and "with button effect" where the button effect is executed. In the case of "no button production", it corresponds to the core production and corresponds to non-chance up. In the case of "with button effect", the button effect is realized at timing 5, which corresponds to an increase in chance.

In S5125 of FIG. 66, the effect control microcomputer 91 is non-chance-up when, for example, the core effect pattern is "SP1", the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the chance-up random number value is 100. When "without button effect" is selected and the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot and the chance-up random value is 100, "with button effect" is selected as the chance-up at timing 5.

[Opening effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the opening effect pattern determination process (FIG. 55: step S4480). In step S5200, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the opening command. This is the process of acquiring the data included in the opening command. In step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the opening effect pattern determination process. Multiple types of opening effect patterns are prepared, and the opening effect pattern is determined by the data included in the opening command. In step S5210, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the opening effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so that the opening effect is realized in the determined opening effect pattern.

[Round production pattern determination process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the details of the round effect pattern determination process (FIG. 55: step S4490). In step S5300, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the round-wide effect determination process. This is a process of determining the type of round effect over 16R according to the jackpot type. Details of this round-wide production determination process will be described later.

In step S5305, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the round designation command. This is a process of acquiring the data included in the round specification command (for example, the data indicating the number of rounds this time).

In step S5310, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the reference round effect corresponding to the round based on the data obtained by the analysis of the round designation command and the round effect determined in step S5300.

In the next step S5315, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure stop symbol data is any one of 11H, 12H, 13H, and 21H. These are jackpots scheduled to pass through V, and are jackpots accompanied by a V-passage suggestion effect. Here, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is any one of 11H, 12H, 13H, and 21H (step S5315: YES), the process proceeds to step S5320. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is other than 11H, 12H, 13H, and 21H (step S5315: NO), the process proceeds to step S5340.

In step S5320, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the first specific round. In the present embodiment, a first specific round, which is a round in which a suggestion effect regarding V passage is planned, is set in advance. Specifically, in the first specific round, when the special symbol stop symbol data is 11H, 12H, 21H, it is 14R, and when the special symbol stop symbol data is 13H, it is 16R. Here, it is determined that it is 14R or 16R depending on the special figure stop symbol data. If it is determined that this is the first specific round (step S5320: YES), the process proceeds to step S5325. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first specific round (step S5320: NO), the process proceeds to step S5340.

In step S5325, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V passage flag is ON. The V-pass flag is turned ON when a V-pass command is received (step S4515: YES, step S4520). If it is determined that the V-passing flag is ON (step S5325: YES), the V-passing suggestion effect is determined in step S5330, and the process proceeds to step S5340. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V-passing flag is not ON (step S5325: NO), that is, when the V-passing flag is OFF, the V-passage suggestion effect is determined in step S5335, and the process proceeds to step S5340. ..

In step S5340, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure stop symbol data is other than 17H. The special figure stop symbol data 17H is a big hit scheduled to not pass V. Here, an affirmative judgment is made when the jackpot is scheduled to pass V. Here, if it is determined that the specific stop symbol data is other than 17H (step S5340: YES), that is, if it is a jackpot scheduled to pass V, the process proceeds to step S5345. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is 17H (step S5340: NO), that is, when it is a jackpot scheduled to not pass through V, the process proceeds to step S5360.

In step S5345, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the second specific round. In the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, the long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed in two rounds. Here, the second specific round corresponds to the second round in which the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened.

Specifically, in the case of "16RV passing jackpot (special figure stop symbol data is 11H, 12H, 21H)", the second specific round is 12R. In the case of "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot (special figure stop symbol data is 13H)", the second specific round is 10R. Regarding "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", when the special symbol stop symbol data is 14H, the second specific round is 6R, and when the special symbol stop symbol data is 15H, the second specific round is 8R. Yes, when the special figure stop symbol data is 16H, the second specific round is 10R. If it is determined that this is the second specific round (step S5345: YES), the process proceeds to step S5350. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the second specific round (step S5345: NO), the process proceeds to step S5360.

In step S5350, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V passage flag is ON. The V-pass flag is turned ON when a V-pass command is received (step S4515: YES, step S4520). If it is determined that the V passage flag is ON (step S5350: YES), the process proceeds to step S5360. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V-passing flag is not ON (step S5350: NO), that is, when the V-passing flag is OFF, the right-handed notification effect is determined in step S5355, and the process proceeds to step S5360.

In the case of non-passing V in the first round in which the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed, if V is not passed in the second round, it is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, when V does not pass in the first round, this right-handed notification effect is executed in order to promote V passage in the second round. Details of this right-handed notification effect will be described later.

In step S5360, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates a round effect pattern. This is a process of creating a round effect pattern by adding effect information for realizing the effect if there is an effect determined in steps S5330, S5335, and S5355 to the reference round effect corresponding to the round. Is. In this way, the round effect pattern is determined. In step S5365, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the round effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so as to realize the round effect based on the round effect pattern completed in step S5360.

[Round overall production decision processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the details of the round-wide effect determination process (FIG. 71: step S5300). In step S5400, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the first round. If it is determined that this is the first round (step S5400: YES), the process proceeds to step S5405. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first round (step S5400: NO), the subsequent processing is not executed, and the entire round effect determination process is terminated.

In step S5405, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure stop symbol data is 11H or 21H. When the special symbol stop symbol data is 11H or 21H, it is a "16RV passing jackpot", and in particular, it is a jackpot with a gold symbol. Here, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is 11H or 21H (step S5405: YES), the high-accuracy time-shortening rush schedule effect is determined in step S5410, and the round-wide effect determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is neither 11H nor 21H (step S5405: NO), the process proceeds to step S5415.

In step S5415, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure stop symbol data is 12H. When the special figure stop symbol data is 12H, it is a "16RV passing jackpot". Here, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is 12H (step S5415: YES), the battle victory effect is determined in step S5420, and the round-wide effect determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is not 12H (step S5415: NO), the process proceeds to step S5425.

In step S5425, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure stop symbol data is 13H. When the special figure stop symbol data is 13H, it is "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot". Here, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is 13H (step S5425: YES), the battle revival effect is determined in step S5430, and the round-wide effect determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol stop symbol data is not 13H (step S5425: NO), that is, when the special symbol stop symbol data is any of 14H to 17H, the battle defeat effect is determined in step S5435. Then, the process of determining the overall production of the round is completed.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the details of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 55: step S4500). In step S5500, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the ending command. This is the process of acquiring the data included in the ending command. In step S5505, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the ending effect pattern determination process. A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined by the data included in the ending command. In step S5510, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so that the ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized.

In step S5515, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure stop symbol data is any of 14H to 17H. When the special figure stop symbol data is 14H to 16H, it is a "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and although it will be in a high-accuracy time-shortening game state after the jackpot ends, a so-called low-accuracy time-saving effect is performed halfway. It is a latent probability change. When the special figure stop symbol data is 17H, it is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and after the jackpot ends, the game is in a low probability time and short game state. Here, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is any of 14H to 17H (step S5515: YES), the fanning effect flag is turned ON in step S5520, and the process proceeds to step S5525. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure stop symbol data is neither 14H to 17H (step S5515: NO), the process proceeds to step S5545.

In step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V passage flag is ON. The V-pass flag is turned ON when a V-pass command is received (step S4515: YES, step S4520). If it is determined that the V passage flag is ON (step S5525: YES), the time saving effect change flag is turned ON in step S5530, the low accuracy time saving effect flag is turned ON in step S5535, and the process proceeds to step S5540. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V pass flag is not ON (step S5525: NO), that is, when the V pass flag is OFF, the low accuracy time saving effect flag is turned ON in step S5535, and the process proceeds to step S5540. ..

In step S5545, which shifts to the case where a negative determination is made in step S5515, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag is ON. The V-pass flag is turned ON when a V-pass command is received (step S4515: YES, step S4520). If it is determined that the V-passing flag is ON (step S5545: YES), the high-accuracy time-saving effect flag is turned ON in step S5550, and the process proceeds to step S5540. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V pass flag is not ON (step S5545: NO), that is, when the V pass flag is OFF, the low accuracy time saving effect flag is turned ON in step S5535, and the process proceeds to step S5540. ..

In step S5540, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the time reduction counter. The time reduction counter is set to "160" when the V-passing flag is ON, and is set to "100" when the V-passing flag is OFF. In step S5555, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the rotation speed counter to “0”. Next, in step S5560, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off the V passage flag.

[Switch processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing details of the switch process (FIG. 53: step S4305). In step S5600, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the switch effect timer value is larger than 0. The switch effect is an effect by operating the effect button 63. The operation of the effect button 63 is detected by the effect button detection switch 63a. If it is determined that the switch effect timer value is larger than 0 (step S5600: YES), the process proceeds to step S5605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switch effect timer value is 0 (step S5600: NO), the process proceeds to step S5625.

In step S5605, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the switch has been pressed. This is a process of determining whether or not the operation of the effect button 63 is detected by the effect button detection switch 63a. If it is determined that the switch has been pressed (step S5605: YES), the switch information is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 94 in step S5610, the switch effect timer value is set to "0" in step S5615, and the switch is switched. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switch is not pressed (step S5605: NO), the switch effect timer value is subtracted in step S5620, and the switch process ends.

In step S5625, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the switch processing. If it is determined that it is the switch processing start timing (step S5625: YES), the switch effect timer value is set in step S5630, and the switch processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the switch processing start timing (step S5625: NO), the processing of step S5630 is not executed and the switch processing is terminated.

[RAM clear notification stop processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing details of the RAM clear notification stop process (FIG. 55: step S4535). In step S5700, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the notification timer value is set. When the RAM clear notification is started, the value of the notification timer is set as a positive integer (step S4410). If it is determined that the notification timer value is set here (step S5700: YES), the notification timer value is subtracted in step S5705, and the process proceeds to step S5710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification timer value is not set (step S5700: NO), that is, when the notification timer value is "0", the subsequent processing is not executed and the RAM clear notification stop processing is performed. finish.

In step S5710, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the notification timer value is “0”. If it is determined that the notification timer value is 0 (step S5710: YES), the RAM clear notification is stopped in step S5715, and the RAM clear notification stop process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification timer value is larger than 0 (step S5710: NO), the processing of step S5715 is not executed, and the RAM clear notification stop processing is terminated.

10. Specific Example of Movable Accessory Production FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing an example of the movable accessory effect, and shows a state in which the frame movable body 600 is driven. The frame movable body 600 is divided into a right side movable body 600R and a left side movable body 600L. The right movable body 600R is rotationally driven counterclockwise in the front view around an axis (also referred to as a front-back direction axis) provided in the front-rear direction at the center of the upper surface of the frame movable body 600 shown in FIG. The 600L is rotationally driven clockwise around the front-rear axis. As a result, the head of the character is composed of the right movable body 600R and the left movable body 600L. The drive of the frame movable body 600 is realized by the effect control microcomputer 91 controlling the accessory driving motor 641 via the frame relay board 99.

11. Specific example of display production
[Example of variable production only for core production (no chance up)]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect (without chance increase) of only the core effect. That is, FIG. 77 shows the core production itself. This display effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91. The display effects shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F) include the core effect pattern "SP1 (no pseudo)" corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern P61 (variation pattern that becomes a big hit), and provide chance-up information such as display effects. This is an example of a display effect based on a variable effect pattern that does not include, and a series of display effects (variable start effect, reach formation effect, super reach effect, super reach development effect, hit effect, and symbol stop effect) are arranged in chronological order. Shown.

In the series of display effects shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F), first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change. Is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the two effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach forming effect for forming the reach is executed. In FIG. 77 (B), "7" is used as the reach symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the super reach effect is executed as a development effect from the reach formation effect. In this super reach effect, the background image is set to a light color (for example, light blue), and the effect symbols 8L and 8R move slightly upward as compared with the time of the reach formation effect, and are formed smaller. Further, in this super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), an effect in which a ally character CRA wearing armor appears at timing 1 is realized. In this super reach production, the color of the armor of the ally character CRA is copper based on the core production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the super reach development effect is executed as a development effect from the super reach effect. In this super reach development effect, the positions and sizes of the effect symbols 8L and 8R are the same as those at the time of the super reach effect, and the effect of transforming the ally character CRA is realized. It should be noted that the cut-in effect is not realized based on the core effect at the timing 2 during the super reach development effect. Further, at the timing 3 during the super reach development production, the normal sound effect is output from the speaker 67 based on the core production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the hit effect is executed. In this hit effect, the effect suggesting a big hit is realized by the ally character CRA, and the big hit symbol arrangement (in this embodiment, doublet numbers) indicating that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are big hits is provisionally. Stop is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are enlarged and displayed, and the confirmed stop effect of confirming and stopping in the jackpot symbol arrangement is executed. In addition, FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F) show the reserved image group 9A which shows the reserved number of special figure 1, the reserved image group 9B which shows the reserved number of special figure 2, and the game information related to the variation. Hold digestion image 9C is shown. The reserved image group 9A and the reserved image group 9B are configured to display the number of reserved images by the number of balls. In the display effect example described below, when the hold display and the hold digestion display exist, they are indicated by the same reference numerals.

[Example of variable production based on core production and chance up]
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect based on a core effect and a chance increase. This display effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91. The display effects shown in FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F) include the core effect pattern "SP1 (no pseudo)" corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern P61 (variation pattern that becomes a big hit), and chance-up information related to the display effect. This is an example of a display effect based on a variable effect pattern including chance-up information related to sound effect, and a series of display effects (variable start effect, reach formation effect, super reach effect, super reach development effect, hit effect, and The symbol stop effect) is shown in chronological order.

The series of display effects shown in FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F) has the same core effect as the display effect of FIG. 77, that is, the parts other than the chance up are the same as the display effect shown in FIG. 77. , The description of the same part is omitted. Specifically, the description of the fluctuation start effect of FIG. 78 (A), the reach formation effect of (B), the hit effect of (E), and the symbol stop effect of (F) will be omitted.

In the display effect example when there is this chance increase, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), at the timing 1 of the super reach effect, an effect in which a ally character CRA wearing golden armor appears as a chance increase is realized. The body armor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), in the super reach development effect, a cut-in effect of displaying the cut-in image CTIN at timing 2 is realized as a chance up. The cut-in image CTIN is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 7, and includes a wording that raises the expectation of a big hit. Further, in the super reach development production, the special sound effect 1 is output from the speaker 67 at the timing 3 as a chance up.

[Example of button production and example of movable accessory production]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a button effect and an example of a movable accessory effect. This button effect is an effect included in the display effect, and is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91. The movable accessory effect is executed by operating the frame movable body 600 by the effect control microcomputer 91. These button effects and movable accessory effects correspond to increasing chances.

The display effects shown in FIGS. 79 (A) to 79 (D) include the core effect pattern "SP1 (no pseudo)" corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern P61 (variation pattern that becomes a big hit), and chance-up information related to the button effect. This is an example of a super reach development effect among display effects based on a variable effect pattern including chance-up information related to a movable character effect, and this super reach development effect is shown in chronological order. In this super reach development effect, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the super reach development effect is started, and then at timing 4, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the frame movable body 600 is a game machine. A movable character effect that pops out from the upper part of 1 is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), at the timing 5, a button display effect for displaying the button image BTN on the image display device 7 is executed as the button effect. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63.

Next, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the balloon image FDS is displayed at the place where the button image BTN was displayed in the image display device 7 as the button effect. The balloon display effect is executed. The balloon image FDS of the present embodiment shows "super hot", which is a wording suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a big hit. If the effect button 63 is not pressed by the player, the balloon display effect may not be executed, or the balloon display effect may be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Zone production example]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of zone effect. This zone effect is included in the display effect and is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91. This zone production corresponds to a chance up. This zone effect is an effect that can be continuously executed by a plurality of fluctuations, and the example of FIG. 80 shows a zone effect in a specific one variation.

The display effects shown in FIGS. 80 (A) to 80 (F) include the core effect pattern "SP1 (no pseudo)" corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern P61 (variation pattern that becomes a big hit), and chance-up information related to the zone effect. This is an example of a display effect based on a variation effect pattern including, and shows a series of display effects (variation start effect, reach formation effect, super reach effect, super reach development effect, hit effect, and symbol stop effect) in chronological order. ing.

The series of display effects shown in FIGS. 80 (A) to 80 (F) have the same core effects as those shown in FIG. 77, that is, the parts other than the chance up are the same as the display effects shown in FIG. 77. , The description of the same part is omitted. Specifically, the description of the super reach effect of FIG. 80 (C), the super reach development effect of (D), the hit effect of (E), and the symbol stop effect of (F) will be omitted. In the display effect including this zone effect, in the variation start effect shown in FIG. 80 (A) and the reach formation effect shown in FIG. 80 (B), when the color of the background image is FIG. 77 (zone effect is executed). It is set to a darker color (eg, red) compared to (if not).

[Example of pending change production]
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a pending change effect. This pending change effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91. This pending change effect corresponds to a chance up. The hold change effect shown in FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (E) shows a case where there is no additional hold corresponding to the special figure 2.

The pending change effect shown in FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (E) is a process (step S4630) for storing the scenario information of the scenario information determination process shown in FIG. 57, and corresponds to the special figure 2 in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. This is an effect executed when "403" is stored as scenario information in the fourth storage area, and shows changes in the hold display in chronological order.

The reserved image group 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 has a first reserved image 9B1, a second reserved image 9B2, a third reserved image 9B3, and a fourth reserved image 9B4, which are ball-shaped images, respectively. , As described above, it is possible to indicate the number of pending images (also referred to as the number of pending images) by the number of these reserved images. For example, when the number of holdings corresponding to the special figure 2 is one, only the first holding image 9B1 of the holding image group 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). For example, when the number of holdings corresponding to the special figure 2 is two, as shown in FIG. 81C, the first holding image 9B1 and the second holding image 9B2 of the holding image group 9B are displayed. .. For example, when the number of holdings corresponding to the special figure 2 is 3, as shown in FIG. 81B, the first holding image 9B1 to the third holding image 9B3 of the holding image group 9B are displayed. For example, when the number of reserved images corresponding to the special figure 2 is 4, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the 1st reserved image 9B1 to the 4th reserved image 9B4 of the reserved image group 9B are displayed. The first reserved images 9B1 to the fourth reserved images 9B4 are displayed side by side in a horizontal row.

After "403" is stored as scenario information in the fourth storage area corresponding to the special figure 2 in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the hold display process (step S4450) of the received command analysis process shown in FIG. 54 is executed. As shown in FIG. 81 (A), in the reserved image group 9B, in addition to the first reserved image 9B1 to the third reserved image 9B3, the game control microcomputer 81 side corresponds to the fourth special figure 2. The fourth hold image 9B4 indicating that the hold has been stored is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81 (A), the colors of the fourth reserved image 9B4 are the pre-determination information storage area 94c (see FIG. 56 (A)) and the scenario information determination table T75 (see FIG. 58 (A)). Is set to white based on. The white fourth reserved image 9B4 is shown in white in the figure. When "403" is stored as scenario information in the fourth storage area corresponding to the special figure 2 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the scenario information corresponding to the special figure 2 is originally stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. Since this is not the case (see FIG. 57: S4610), in FIG. 81A, the colors of the first reserved image 9B1 to the third reserved image 9B3 are also set to white in the same manner.

Subsequently, when shifting to the next variation display, that is, when the hold display shift process (step S5005) of the variation effect start process shown in FIG. 65 is executed, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the fourth The display of the reserved image 9B4 is extinguished, and the color of the third reserved image 9B3 is displayed in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (see FIG. 56 (B)) and the scenario information determination table T75 (see FIG. 58 (A)). Based on that, set it to remain white.

Subsequently, when further shifting to the next variable display, that is, when the next hold display shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the display of the third hold image 9B3 is extinguished and the display is extinguished. The color of the second reserved image 9B2 is set to red based on the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the scenario information determination table T75 (see FIG. 58 (A)). In this case, in FIG. 81C, the red second reserved image 9B2 is shown by hatching.

Subsequently, when further shifting to the next variable display, that is, when the next hold display shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the display of the second hold image 9B2 is extinguished and the display is extinguished. The color of the first reserved image 9B1 is set to red based on the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the scenario information determination table T75 (see FIG. 58 (A)). In this case, in FIG. 81 (D), the red second reserved image 9B1 is shown by hatching.

Subsequently, when further shifting to the next variable display, that is, when the next hold display shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the display of the first hold image 9B1 is extinguished and the display is extinguished. The color of the reserved digestion image 9C is set to red based on the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the scenario information determination table T75 (see FIG. 58 (A)). In this case, in FIG. 81 (E), the red reserved digestion image 9C is shown by hatching.

The above-mentioned hold change effect of the present embodiment was executed for the hold image group 9B corresponding to the special figure 2, but in the same manner as described above, for the hold image group 9A corresponding to the special figure 1. You may want to do it.

[Example of pseudo-continuous production]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous production. This pseudo continuous effect is included in the display effect and is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91. The display effect shown in FIGS. 82 (A) to 82 (D) is a display effect based on the variation effect pattern including the core effect pattern “SP1 (with pseudo)” corresponding to the above-mentioned variation pattern P62 (variation pattern that becomes a big hit). This is an example. In detail, the production mainly corresponds to the part corresponding to the pseudo continuous production in the display production, and a series of productions after the reach formation production (super reach production, super reach development production, hit production, and , The symbol stop effect) is the same as the display effect of FIG. 77, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this pseudo continuous effect, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), the variation start effect is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the temporary stop effect is executed. In this temporary stop effect, the two effect symbols 8L and 8R are set to the same symbol, and the effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined logo symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a pseudo-variation effect is executed in which the effect symbol is changed again from the temporarily stopped state. After that, the process shifts to the reach formation effect shown in FIG. 82 (D). The effects shown in FIGS. 82 (A) to 82 (C) correspond to the pseudo continuous effect.

[Explanation of non-time saving production]
The display effect examples of FIGS. 77 to 82 described above are display effects in the non-time saving state, and correspond to the non-time saving effect (FIG. 66: S5197). In the non-time saving effect, the color of the background image is the same (for example, light blue) except during the zone effect.

[Transition of display effect of jackpot game state and time saving state]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display effect of the jackpot game state and the time saving state corresponding to each special figure stop symbol data.

As shown in FIG. 83 (A), when the special figure stop symbol data is 11H and 21H (see FIG. 45), the high-accuracy time-short rush schedule effect is executed in the jackpot game state (see FIG. 72: S5410). ), When the V passage flag is turned ON during the jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving effect described later is executed in the subsequent time-saving state (see FIG. 66: S5165).

As shown in FIG. 83 (B), when the special figure stop symbol data is 12H (see FIG. 45), the battle victory effect described later is executed in the jackpot game state (see FIG. 72: S5420), and the jackpot is achieved. When the V passage flag is turned ON during the game, the high-accuracy time-saving effect described later is executed in the subsequent time-saving state (see FIG. 66: S5165).

As shown in FIG. 83 (C), when the special figure stop symbol data is 13H (see FIG. 45), the battle revival effect is executed in the jackpot game state (see FIG. 72: S5430), and the jackpot game is in progress. When the V passage flag is turned on, the high-accuracy time-saving effect described later is executed in the subsequent time-saving state (see FIG. 66: S5165).

As shown in FIG. 83 (D), when the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, and 16H (see FIGS. 46 and 47), the battle defeat effect described later is executed in the jackpot game state. (See FIG. 72: S5435) When the V passage flag is turned ON during the jackpot game, the low-accuracy time-saving effect described later is executed in the subsequent time-saving state (FIG. 66: S5185), and then described later. A high-accuracy time-saving effect can be executed (see FIG. 66: S5165). During this low-accuracy time-saving effect, a fanning effect described later may be executed. Further, at the time of transition from the low-accuracy time-saving effect to the high-accuracy time-saving effect, the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect described later is executed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (E), when the special figure stop symbol data is 17H (see FIG. 47), the battle defeat effect described later is executed in the jackpot game state (see FIG. 72: S5435), and the jackpot is achieved. Since the V passage flag is not turned on during the game, the low-accuracy time-saving effect described later is executed in the subsequent time-saving state (see FIG. 66: S5185).

[Battle victory production]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a battle victory effect. This battle victory effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 12H. In the battle victory effect, when the round game becomes 8R (8 rounds), as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the 8R effect representing the battle scene between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is executed. When the round game is 10R (10 rounds) and 12R (12 rounds), the long opening A of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed. On the other hand, in these rounds (10th round and 12th round), even if the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the V opening suggests that the player can enter the V region 39. No suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 92 (D)) is performed. Further, in these rounds, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 and the V passage flag is switched to ON, the V passage suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the game ball has entered the V area 39 ( For example, FIG. 84 (D)) is not performed. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 does not perform the V opening suggestion effect or the V passage suggestion effect when the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the V region 39 is provided in the first large winning opening 30, and that the 10th and 12th rounds are the open rounds of the V opening / closing member 71. Become. When the round game is 12R (12 rounds), as shown in FIG. 84B, a 12R effect representing a scene in which the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB is executed as a result of the battle. When the round game becomes 13R (13 rounds), as shown in FIG. 84C, a 13R effect representing a scene in which the ally character CRA transforms and declares victory is executed.

When the round game is 14R (14th round), when the V passage flag is ON, the background image is changed to a gorgeous background image having a plurality of star-shaped images as compared with 13R, as shown in FIG. 84 (D). Then, the 14R effect A for displaying the blessing image SKF for blessing the player is executed. This 14R effect A corresponds to a V passage suggestion effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V area 39 (see FIG. 71: S5330). In the example of FIG. 84 (D), the blessing image SKF shows the characters "Congratulations". That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the V passage suggestion effect in the round in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened and the V opening / closing member 71 is not opened. Therefore, the player thinks that the V region 39 is provided in the second large winning opening 35, and that the 14th round is the open round of the V opening / closing member 71. Therefore, according to this configuration, the gaming state can be switched without being noticed by the player.

When the round game is 14R (14th round) and the V passage flag is OFF, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the background image is not changed from 13R, and the ally character CRA is disappointed. The 14R effect B is executed, which shows the state of being present and displays an unlucky image ULK suggesting that the player has suffered bad luck. This 14R effect B corresponds to a V non-passage suggestion effect that suggests that the game ball did not enter the V region (V area sensor 39A) (the V pass flag is OFF) (FIG. 71: S5335). reference). In the example of FIG. 84 (E), the unlucky image ULK shows the characters "unlucky".

[Battle defeat production]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a battle defeat effect. This battle defeat effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H, and 17H. In the battle defeat production, when the round game becomes 8R (8 rounds), as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the 8R production representing the battle scene between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is executed. When the special figure stop symbol data is 14H and the round game is 2R (second round) and 6R (sixth round), the long opening (long opening A or long opening B) of the V opening / closing member 71 is performed. Further, when the special figure stop symbol data is 15H and the round game is 4R (4th round) and 8R (8th round), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened. Further, when the special figure stop symbol data is 16H and the round game is 6R (6th round) and 10R (10th round), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened. On the other hand, in these V opening rounds, even if the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the V opening suggestion effect suggesting that the player can enter the V region 39 (for example, FIG. 92). (D)) is not performed. Further, in these rounds, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 and the V passage flag is switched to ON, V suggests to the player that the game ball has entered the V area 39 in these rounds. There is no passage suggestion effect. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 does not perform the V opening suggestion effect or the V passage suggestion effect when the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state. Therefore, the player cannot recognize that the V region 39 is provided in the first winning opening 30 and which round the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 is. Further, even if the game ball enters the V region 39 in these rounds, the player thinks that the game ball has not yet entered the V region 39.

When the round game is 12R (12 rounds), as shown in FIG. 85B, a 12R effect representing a scene in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is executed as a result of the battle. Next, when the round game is 13R (13th round), as shown in FIG. 85C, a 13R effect representing a scene in which the ally character CRA collapses and suggests defeat is executed.

As described above, in the battle defeat effect, the V opening suggestion effect and the V passage suggestion effect are not performed in the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" from the battle defeat production. In addition, "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" are both low-accuracy time-saving effects after the jackpot game. As a result, the high-accuracy time-shortening state after the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" can be changed to the latent probability-changing state, which can give the player unexpectedness.

[Battle revival production]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a battle revival effect. This battle revival effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 13H. This battle revival effect is the same as the battle defeat effect (see FIGS. 85 (A) to (C)) for the 8R effect, the 12R effect, and the 13R effect shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (C). That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 does not perform the V passage suggestion effect even if the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the open rounds (8th round and 10th round) of the V opening / closing member 71. On the other hand, in the round (16th round) in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened and the V opening / closing member 71 is not opened, the V passage suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, even in this production, the player thinks that the V region 39 is provided in the second large winning opening 35, and that the 16th round is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71. To do. Therefore, according to this configuration, the gaming state can be switched without being noticed by the player.
Therefore, the description is omitted.

In the battle revival production, after the 13R production (scene suggesting defeat) shown in FIG. 86 (C), when the round game becomes 15R (15 rounds), the jackpot game still continues as shown in FIG. 86 (D). Along with displaying the game continuation suggestion image FKT suggesting that, a 15R effect showing a scene suggesting that the ally character CRA has stood up and revived is executed. In the example of FIG. 86 (D), the game continuation suggestion image FKT shows the characters "Resurrection !!".

When the round game is 16R (16 rounds) and the V passage flag is ON, the 16R effect A (V passage suggestion effect) is executed as shown in FIG. 86 (E). This 16R effect A is the same effect as the 14R effect A of the battle victory effect shown in FIG. 84 (D).

On the other hand, when the round game is 16R (16 rounds) and the V passage flag is OFF, 16R effect B (V non-passage suggestion effect) is executed as shown in FIG. 86 (F). This 16R effect B is the same effect as the 14R effect B of the battle victory effect shown in FIG. 84 (E).

[Example of low-accuracy time-saving production]
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a low-accuracy time-saving effect. This low-accuracy time-saving effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the start of the time-saving state after the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, and 16H. .. In this low-accuracy time-saving effect, as shown in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (F), the background image at the time of the variable effect is set to a color (for example, green) different from that at the time of the non-time-saving effect or the zone effect. The display effects shown in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (F) employ the display effects shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F).

[High-accuracy time-saving production example]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a high-accuracy time-saving effect. This high-accuracy time-saving effect is executed on the image display device 7 by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the start of the time-saving state after the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 11H, 12H, 13H, and 21H. Will be done. Further, the high-accuracy time-saving effect can be executed from the middle of the time-saving state after the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, and 16H.

As shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (F), this high-accuracy time-saving effect has a different color (for example,) from the background image during the variable-time effect during the non-time-saving effect, the zone effect, or the low-accuracy time-saving effect. , Pink). The display effects of FIGS. 88 (A) to (F) adopt the display effects of FIGS. 77 (A) to (F).

[Example of fanning production]
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a fanning effect. This fanning effect is executed on the image display device 7 during the variation start effect during the variation effect by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specifically, the fanning effect is executed when the fanning effect execution information is stored in the fanning effect execution information column corresponding to the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (S5150: YES in FIG. 66), that is, the special feature. It can be executed during the low-accuracy time-saving effect executed after the jackpot game state when the figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H, and 17H.

As for the fanning effect, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the logo grasping effect is executed. This logo grab effect is an effect in which the hand HND representing the hand of a predetermined character tries to grab the logo RGO. The logo RGO indicates the virtual number of times until the end of the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining time saving virtual number). The remaining virtual number of time reductions is set to 100 at the start of the time reduction state, and is obtained by subtracting 1 each time the number of time reductions increases by 1. Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), the logo grasping failure effect A is executed. This logo grab failure effect A is an effect representing a scene in which the hand HND fails to grab the logo RGO. Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the logo grasping failure effect B is executed. This logo grab failure effect B is an effect representing a scene in which the logo RGO is completely away from the hand HND.

As described above, the fanning effect is executed during the variation start effect of the variation effect, but the variation effect after the variation start effect (after the end of the fanning effect) is omitted in FIG. 89. Since the fanning effect is executed during the low-accuracy time-saving effect, the background image is set as the background image for the low-accuracy time-saving effect even after the variation start effect (after the fanning effect ends).

This fanning effect may be executed before the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush confirmation effect, or may be executed when the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush confirmation effect is not executed. High-accuracy time-saving effect rush The fanning effect executed before the final effect has the role of a precursory effect to the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush. Since the fanning effect can appear only during the low-accuracy time-saving effect, the background image is shown as the background image for the low-accuracy time-saving effect in FIG. 89.

[High-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation production example]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of a high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect. The high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the image display device 7 during the variation start effect during the variation effect. Specifically, in this high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect, the high-accuracy time-saving rush information is stored in the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information column corresponding to the area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c with the time-saving effect change flag ON. (S5137: YES in FIG. 66). That is, the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect is executed in place of the low-accuracy time-saving effect that is executed after the jackpot game state when the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, and 16H.

As for the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the logo grasping effect is executed. This logo grasping effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 89A, and the background image is also shown as a background image (for example, green) for a low-accuracy time-saving effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the logo grasping success effect is executed. This logo grasping success production is a production representing a scene in which the hand HND succeeds in grasping the logo RGO. In addition, the background image is also shown as a background image for a low-accuracy time-saving effect for this logo-grabbing success effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the logo hold effect is executed. This logo hold effect is an effect that represents a scene in which the hand HND holds the logo RGO and they are held by the chain KSR. Further, also for this logo hold effect, the background image is shown as the background image for the low-accuracy time-saving effect. The logo RGO held by the chain KSR is also referred to as a hold state logo HLD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the high-accuracy time-shortening rush suggestion effect is executed. This high-accuracy time-saving rush suggestion effect displays the high-accuracy time-saving suggestion image TNY and changes the background image from the background image for low-accuracy time-saving to the background image for high-accuracy time-saving effect (for example, pink). , It suggests that the low-accuracy time-saving effect will be switched to the high-accuracy time-saving effect. In the example of FIG. 90 (D), the high-accuracy time-saving suggestion image TNY shows the characters "high-accuracy time-saving rush !!". In addition, the hold state logo HLD is also displayed in the high-accuracy time-saving rush suggestion effect. As a result, the remaining virtual number of time reductions shown in the logo RGO is not subtracted, and it can be suggested that the time reduction state is high.

In FIG. 90, the variation effect after the high-accuracy time-shortening rush suggestion effect is omitted. As for the variable effect after the high-accuracy time-saving rush suggestion effect, the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is continued, and the effect of setting the background image as the background image for the high-accuracy time-saving effect is executed.

[Right-handed notification production example]
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification effect. This right-handed notification effect is executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the image display device 7. Specifically, the right-handed notification effect is executed when the second specific round is reached (S5345: YES in FIG. 71) and the V passage flag is not ON (step S5350: NO) in the jackpot game state. It is a production. Hereinafter, the right-handed notification effect executed at the time of the display effect of the jackpot game state (at the time of the battle victory effect) when the special figure stop symbol data is 12H will be described. In addition, since FIGS.

In the jackpot game when the special figure stop symbol data is 12H, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened at 10R, but if the game ball is not hit right at this time, the game ball passes through the V area sensor 39A. That is, the V passage flag does not turn ON. Therefore, in 12R where the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened again, if the V passage flag is not ON, the right-handed notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91 (B). In this right-handed notification effect, a right-handed propulsion image MGT for promoting the right-handed hit of the game ball is displayed. In the example of FIG. 91 (B), in the right-handed propulsion image MGT, the characters "Right-handed !!" and the target position when the player hits the game ball are on the right side of the game board surface. It consists of an arrow symbol to inform you.

12. Example of effect of this embodiment FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of an effect during a jackpot game in a conventional game machine 1A as a comparative example. The game machine 1A of the comparative example has the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening like the game machine 1 of the first embodiment, but unlike the game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second large winning opening. A V opening / closing member is arranged in the winning opening. Further, unlike the game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the game machine 1A of the comparative example is predetermined from the opening of the large winning opening regardless of whether or not the ball is entered into the large winning opening in which the V opening / closing member is arranged. After the lapse of time (for example, 3 seconds), it is opened for a certain period of time. In the 14th and 16th rounds, the gaming machine 1A of this comparative example opens the V opening / closing member for a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) 3 seconds after the opening of the second large winning opening (short opening or long opening). The gaming machine 1A of the comparative example can execute a jackpot game that allows the ball to enter the V region and a jackpot game that does not allow the ball to enter the V region. Short open the mouth (eg 0.1 seconds). In this short opening, the game ball hardly wins.

In the jackpot game that allows the ball to enter the V region, the gaming machine 1A of the comparative example opens the second big winning opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and becomes the second big winning opening. When the winning game ball passes through the V region, the game state after the big hit game is switched to the probability change state. On the other hand, in the big hit game that does not allow the ball to enter the V area, the second big winning opening leading to the V area is hardly opened. Therefore, in this big hit game, the game ball that can win the second big winning opening leading to the V area. The number will be less than the number of balls that can be won in the first prize opening. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game ball that has won the second major winning opening, in which the number of game balls that can be won is relatively small, enters the V region. Therefore, the player thinks that there is no transition to the high probability state after the big hit game if the second big winning opening, which has a relatively small number of winning balls, is hardly opened during the big hit game. There was no surprise, and there was a possibility that the interest of the game would decline.

[Effect 1]
On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30, which has a larger number of winning balls than the second large winning opening 35, can enter the V region 39. Therefore, the game state after the big hit can be switched to the high probability state without being noticed by the player. Therefore, an unexpected event such as winning the next jackpot immediately after the jackpot game is completed is likely to occur, and the player can be given a surprise. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
Further, in the conventional game machine 1A, during the jackpot game in which the ball is not allowed to enter the V region, the second large winning opening provided with the V region is hardly opened, so that the second large winning opening provided with the V region is provided. The period during which the winning opening allows the winning of the game ball is shorter than that of the first major winning opening. Therefore, the player recognizes that the game ball that has won the second large winning opening, which has a relatively short period of allowing the winning, enters the V region. Therefore, the player thinks that if the second big prize opening is not almost opened during the big hit game, there is no transition to the high probability state after the big hit game, which is not surprising and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a possibility of doing. On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 for which the winning period is allowed to be longer than that of the second large winning opening 35 is entered into the V region 39. Since it is configured in, the game ball can be entered into a specific area without being noticed by the player, and the game state after the big hit can be switched to the high probability state. Therefore, an unexpected event such as winning the next jackpot immediately after the jackpot game is completed is likely to occur, and the player can be given a surprise. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot game of "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V region 39, and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing". In the "planned jackpot" jackpot game, the game ball can enter the V region 39. Therefore, the gaming state after the jackpot game of "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" can be a low probability state, and the gaming state after the jackpot game of "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" is a high probability state. Can be. On the other hand, with "16R (real 13R) V scheduled big hit" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing big hit", the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) during the big hit game ) Are the same (Fig. 20: Opening pattern 22), so the player can see "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V non" from the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is difficult to distinguish from "the jackpot that is scheduled to pass". Therefore, according to this configuration, the game state is changed after the jackpot game, which is difficult for the player to distinguish, that is, after the jackpot game with the same number of real rounds (here, the jackpot of "real 13R"). , Not only the low probability state but also the high probability state may occur. Therefore, after the jackpot game, which is difficult to distinguish, the player can experience the high-probability state even though he / she recognizes that the jackpot is in the low-probability state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening during the big hit game of "16RV planned passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot". It is different from the opening pattern of the big winning opening during the big hit game of "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing big hit". According to this configuration, the player can recognize that when the jackpot game having a substantial number of rounds of 15R or 16R is executed, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a high probability state. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the actual number of rounds is not a 15R or 16R jackpot game from the opening pattern of the jackpot during the jackpot game of "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", V It can be disappointing to think that the game state after the big hit game will not be a high probability state because the entry of the game ball into the area 39 is suppressed, but in reality, the V area 39 leads to the first big winning opening 30. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the V region 39, and the game state after the big hit game can be in a high probability state, so that the player can be given a surprise. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the big hit games of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the game ball wins the second big winning opening 35. Is controlled by the V opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning opening 35 so as to be more difficult than the big hit game of "16RV scheduled big hit". According to this configuration, when the player is in the jackpot game of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", the winning of the game ball to the second big winning opening 35 is from the jackpot game of "16RV passing jackpot". Recognizing that it is also difficult, it can be disappointing to think that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 39, but in reality, the V region 39 leads to the first large winning opening 30. , It is possible to enter the game ball into the V region 39, and the game state after the big hit game can be a high probability state. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
When the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment executes the jackpot games of "16RV planned passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" and switches the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state, Perform a high-accuracy time-saving effect that suggests a high-probability state. Further, when the jackpot game of "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is executed and the gaming state after the jackpot game is switched to the low probability state, the low probability time saving effect is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot game of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" is executed and the gaming state after the jackpot game is switched to the high probability state, the gaming state is low even though the gaming state is high probability state. Probability shortening production can be executed. According to this configuration, the player has a low probability that the jackpot type is "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot", that is, the game state after the jackpot game is low. It becomes difficult to distinguish between a state and a high-probability state. Therefore, even if a low-probability time-saving effect is performed after the hit game, it is possible to leave the possibility that the player is actually in a high-probability state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit. .. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
The conventional game machine 1A controls the V opening / closing member (long opening of the V opening / closing member) when a predetermined period elapses after the opening of the second large winning opening, and allows the game ball to enter the V region. It is configured to allow for a period of time. However, in such a game machine, it is easy for the player to determine whether or not the game ball can enter the V region depending on the length of the opening period (long opening or short opening) of the second prize opening. There was a possibility that it could be determined. On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot games of "16RV planned passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", the first Based on the detection of a predetermined number (2 or 6) of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening 30, a control for long-opening the V opening / closing member 71 is executed. According to this configuration, when a predetermined number of winning game balls are detected in the first large winning opening 30, it is possible to allow the gaming balls to enter the V region 39. Therefore, the first large winning opening 30 Regardless of the length of the opening period of, it is possible to set whether or not to allow the game ball to enter the V region 39. As a result, it becomes impossible for the player to easily determine whether or not the game ball can enter the V region 39, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the big hit games of "16RV planned passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", the game to the V region 39. In the round game in which the entry of the ball is detected, the V-passage suggestion effect (FIGS. 84 and 86) is not executed for the player, and the V-passage suggestion effect is executed in a round different from the round game. .. According to this configuration, the player determines whether the V region 39 is provided in the first prize opening 30 or the second prize opening 35, and the game ball is entered into the V region 39. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not it is. Therefore, the game state can be switched to the high probability state by entering the game ball into the V region 39 without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 9]
The game machine 1 of the present embodiment communicates with the V region 39 in the jackpot games of "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled jackpot". In a round game in which the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 37 of the second special winning opening 35 is executed, when the winning of the game ball to the second special winning opening 35 is detected, the V passage suggestion effect (FIG. 84, FIG. 86) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to convince the player that the V region 39 is provided in the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, the game ball can be entered into the V region 39 and the game state can be switched to the high probability state without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 10]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a round game in which the first special winning opening 30 is opened, the number of game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 and the game balls that are discharged from the first large winning opening 30. When a mismatch occurs that does not match the number of, a mismatch notification is performed (FIG. 41), and when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened in the round game in which the mismatch occurs, the V opening / closing member 71 is retried. .. According to this configuration, even if the game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 is jammed inside during the big hit game, the manager of the game machine 1 (hall staff, etc.) can be notified. The ball clogging can be cleared quickly. Further, even when a ball clogging occurs in the V opening / closing member 71, the ball clogging can be cleared by the retry operation.

The gaming machine 1A of the comparative example is in a state where the V opening / closing member is opened and the ball can enter the V region in the 14th and 16th rounds of the jackpot game that allows the ball to enter the V region. A V-opening suggestion effect (FIG. 92 (D)) that suggests to the player is performed. By this V opening suggestion effect, the player can recognize that the V region is arranged inside the second winning opening, and also recognizes that the round is an opening round of the V opening / closing member. it can. On the other hand, the game machine 1 of the first embodiment does not perform the V opening suggestion effect in the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 in the jackpot game. Therefore, the player cannot recognize that the V region 39 is arranged inside the first large winning opening 30, and cannot recognize that the round is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71. .. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can switch the gaming state from the normal state to the probabilistic state without being noticed by the player, and can give the player unexpectedness.

<Second Embodiment>
The gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described as having a configuration in which the fluctuation time at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect is the same as the fluctuation time at the time of the low-accuracy time-shortening effect and the high-accuracy time-shortening effect. That is, in the game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the sub-side effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to determine whether or not to perform the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect at the time of fluctuation, and the main-side game control. The microcomputer 81 does not distinguish between when performing a low-accuracy time-saving effect or a high-accuracy time-saving effect and when performing a high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect during fluctuations, and the same fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is used in any case. (Fig. 18). On the other hand, in the game machine 1B of the second embodiment, the fluctuation time at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect is different from the fluctuation time at the time of the low-accuracy time-shortening effect and the variation time at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening effect. Compared with the game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the game machine 1B of the second embodiment has a variation pattern determination table T6B for high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect added to the main ROM 83, and a flag set of the main RAM 84. A "special fluctuation flag" is added to the area 84b, and a "special fluctuation counter" is added to the counter set area 84c. Further, the game machine 1B of the second embodiment is partially different from the game machine 1 of the first embodiment in the content of the special operation processing in the main side timer interrupt processing. The game machine 1B of the second embodiment does not perform a high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery on the sub side. Therefore, the game machine 1B of the second embodiment does not have the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery table in the sub ROM 93, does not have the time-saving effect flag in the sub RAM, and does not have the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush random number. ..

FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6B for the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect. In the game machine 1B of the second embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 17) in the non-time reduction state and the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) in the time reduction state, the high-accuracy time-saving rush of FIG. The variation pattern determination table T6B for the final effect is stored in the main ROM 83. In the game machine 1B of the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game control microcomputer 81 on the main side causes the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub side to execute the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect, and the high-accuracy When executing the time-saving rush confirmation effect, the variation pattern corresponding to the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 91. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 of the second embodiment does not refer to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) in the time reduction state when the effect control microcomputer 91 is made to execute the high accuracy time reduction rush confirmation effect. Refer to the variation pattern determination table T6B (FIG. 93) for the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect. The variation pattern determination table T6B at the time of the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is set so that the variation time is longer than that of the variation pattern table T6 referred to during the high-accuracy time-shortening time and the low-accuracy time-saving time. The fluctuation time at the time of the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is not limited to the content of FIG. 93 and can be set arbitrarily.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the second embodiment. Compared with the jackpot determination process (FIG. 31) of the first embodiment, only the point that steps S1508 to S1511 are added is different. The other processes (steps S1501 to S1507, S1520) are the same as the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type determined in step S1507 is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot". If the jackpot type is not "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (step S1508: NO), the process is skipped to step S1520. When the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (step S1508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special fluctuation flag is ON (step S1509). When the special fluctuation flag is ON (step S1509: YES), the process skips to step S1520. When the special fluctuation flag is OFF (step S1509: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the special fluctuation flag to ON (step S1510), sets a predetermined value in the special fluctuation counter (step S1511), and then steps S1520. To execute. The special fluctuation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed while the special fluctuation flag is ON. Here, the value set in the special fluctuation counter is different for each special figure stop symbol data of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" determined in step S1507. Here, when the special symbol stop symbol data is 14H, "30" is set in the special fluctuation counter, and when the special symbol stop symbol data is 15H, "80" is set in the special fluctuation counter, and the special symbol stop symbol data is set. When is 16H, "100" is set in the special fluctuation counter. The value set in the special fluctuation counter for each special figure stop symbol data can be arbitrarily set.

[Variation pattern selection process]
95 to 97 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process of the second embodiment. Compared with the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 32 and 33) of the first embodiment, the only difference is that steps S1601, S1610 and S1611 of FIG. 96 are added, and steps S1620 to S1628 of FIG. 97 are added. Since the other processes are the same as the variation pattern selection process of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1601, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special fluctuation flag is ON. When the special fluctuation flag is OFF (step S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the special fluctuation flag is ON (step S1601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the special fluctuation counter by one. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the special fluctuation counter by one (step S1611). When the value of the special fluctuation counter is not "0" (step S1611: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the value of the special fluctuation counter is “0” (step S1611: YES), the process proceeds to step S1620 (FIG. 97).

In step S1620, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1621 to S1627 is the same as the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1621 to S1627 and the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 is that the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1623, S1624, S1626, and S1627 is described in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619. Different from. Specifically, in S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1623, S1624, S1626, and S1627, the time saving rush is high. The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 93) for the final effect is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1623, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect shown in FIG. 93 (special figure). In No. 1, the fluctuation patterns are referred to as “P141” to “P143”, and in Special Figure 2, the fluctuation patterns are referred to as “P161” to “P163”).

From the above, in the second embodiment, in the case of the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 14H in which "30" is set in the special fluctuation counter, in the case of the jackpot of 160 times in the high accuracy time saving state after the jackpot game, the first For the 1st to 29th determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state is referred to. Then, for the 30th determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table T6B (FIG. 93) for the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is referred to. Then, in the 31st to 160th determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state is referred to again. In the case of a jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 15H in which "80" is set in the special fluctuation counter, the first 1st to 79th fluctuation patterns are determined in 160 fluctuations in the high-accuracy time-shortening state after the jackpot game. Refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state. Then, for the 80th determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table T6B (FIG. 93) for the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is referred to. Then, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state is referred to again for the 81st to 160th determination of the variation pattern. In the case of a jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 16H in which "100" is set in the special fluctuation counter, the first 1st to 99th fluctuation patterns are determined in 160 fluctuations in a highly accurate time-saving state after the jackpot game. Refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state. Then, for the determination of the 100th variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table T6B (FIG. 93) for the high-accuracy time-short rush confirmation effect is referred to. Then, in the determination of the variation pattern for the 101st to 160th times, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) for the time saving state is referred to again.

When the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 is 14H, 15H, 16H, the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub side is in a highly accurate time saving state after the big hit game. From the first fluctuation to the Nth (N = 30 or 80 or 100) fluctuation in which the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect is performed, the latent probability change in which the low-accuracy time-saving effect is performed despite the high-accuracy time-saving state. Put it in a state. Specifically, the variation pattern included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 in the highly accurate time-saving state after the jackpot game in which the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H is "P41". In the case of "P73" (first time to N-1 time), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a low accuracy time saving effect in spite of the high accuracy time saving state. Then, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 becomes "P141" to "P173" (when the Nth time is reached), the effect control microcomputer 91 is high. Performs a definite short-time rush confirmation production. After that, while the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 is between "P41" and "P73" (N + 1th to 160th times), the effect control microcomputer 91 produces a highly accurate time-saving effect. To do. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 is 14H, the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub side is 1 in a highly accurate time saving state after the big hit game. In the 29th fluctuation, a low-accuracy time-saving effect is performed in spite of the high-accuracy time-saving state. Then, in the 30th fluctuation, a high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect is performed. Then, in the 31st to 160th fluctuations, a highly accurate time-saving effect is performed.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the variation effect of the second embodiment. In the game machine 1B of the second embodiment, when the special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H, from the first change to the Nth change (N = 30 or 80 or 100) in which the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect is performed. Performs a low-probability time-saving effect as a latent probability-changing state. As a result, the player does not notice that the game state is in the probabilistic state during the low-probability time-saving effect, and the player knows that the game state is in the probable-change state by the subsequent high-probability time-saving rush confirmation effect. Can be surprising. In the gaming machine 1B of the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6B referred to for executing the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect is different from the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in the time-saving state at other times. For example, the fluctuation time at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect can be made longer than the fluctuation effect time at the time of other high-accuracy time-shortening time. As a result, it is possible to more dynamically perform a highly accurate time-saving rush confirmation effect. The variation effect after the high-accuracy time-shortening rush confirmation effect (high-accuracy time-shortening effect) may have the same content as the variation effect after the jackpot game in which the special figure stop symbol data is 11H, 12H, 13H, 21H. It may have different contents.

<Other variants>
[Modification 1]
In the first embodiment, in the "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled jackpot", the V opening / closing member 71 is opened during the jackpot game. As a result, the game ball enters the V region 39 and immediately passes through the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V opening / closing member 71 may be opened during the jackpot game so that the game ball enters the V region 39, is temporarily held, and is discharged from the V region 39.

[Modification 2]
In the first embodiment, in the jackpot games of "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", the opening and closing of the second winning opening 35 in the 14R and 16R round games. Since the member 37 is short-opened, the game ball is hardly won in the second large winning opening 35 during the round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot games of "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot", the second is to the extent that the number of game balls that can be won in the first jackpot 30 is not exceeded. The large winning opening 35 may be configured to win a game ball. For example, in a predetermined round game of "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning opening 35 is long-opened. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls may be awarded to the second large winning opening 35.

[Modification 3]
In the first embodiment, the V region 39 is provided in the first winning device 31, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V region 39 is in a position different from that of the first winning device 31. (For example, it may be provided near the out port 16. In this case, the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region 39 communicate with each other in a predetermined passage, and the game ball that has passed through the V opening / closing member 71 can enter the V region 39 via the passage. Further, in the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 35 cannot enter the V region 39, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball that has won not only the first prize opening 30 but also the second prize opening 35 may be configured to be able to win in the V region 39. In this case, the second special winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 communicate with each other through a predetermined passage, and the game ball winning the second special winning opening 35 reaches the V opening / closing member 71 via the passage. However, if the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, the ball can enter the V region 39.

[Modification example 4]
In the first embodiment, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the big winning openings (first major winning opening 30 and second major winning opening 35). ) Are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different. However, if it is difficult for the player to distinguish, the opening patterns of the respective big prize openings of "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" can be set. They may be different from each other. For example, even if the opening / closing timing of the big winning opening differs by about ± 2 seconds or the number of opening / closing times differs by about ± 2 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two opening patterns. It can be said that the opening patterns are substantially the same, that is, equivalent. That is, the opening patterns of the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" may be the same.

[Modification 5]
In the first embodiment, the jackpot types are "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot", and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing". It was explained as if there was a "planned jackpot" (Fig. 16). However, the jackpot type of the game machine 1 is not limited to the above, and may not include a part of the jackpot types, or may have a jackpot type other than the above. For example, the jackpot type of the game machine 1 is a round in which the actual number of rounds is common except for "13R" instead of "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot". You may have a number of V-passing jackpots and V-non-passing jackpots (eg, real 12RV scheduled passing jackpots and real 12RV non-passing jackpots, etc.). The jackpot type of the game machine 1 does not have to have one or both of "16RV planned passage jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot". That is, there may be only two types of jackpots for the game machine 1, "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot". Even in this case, if the player is provided with "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the player can be surprised. .. Further, the jackpot type of the game machine 1 is, instead of "16RV planned jackpot" and "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot", the actual number of rounds is other than 13R V passing jackpot (for example, less than 13R). It may have a V-passing jackpot). Even in this case, if the player is provided with "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the player can be surprised. ..

[Modification 6]
In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (substantial 15R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage" The opening pattern 31 makes it easier for the game ball that has won the first big winning opening 30 to enter the V region 39 than the opening pattern 36 (FIG. 21) of the V opening / closing member 71 in the big hit game of "planned big hit". , 32, 33, 34, 35 (FIG. 21) control the V opening / closing member 71. In the jackpot games of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot", the game ball that won the first jackpot 30 is in the V area 39. The opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is set so that the ease of entering the ball into the ball (hereinafter, also referred to as the ease of entering the V region) is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to the content of the first embodiment, and the ease of entering the V region may be different in these jackpot games. For example, in the jackpot game of "16RV planned passage jackpot", the opening pattern 32 of the V opening / closing member 71 in the jackpot game of "16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot" or "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" The V opening / closing member 71 may be controlled by an opening pattern having a higher ease of entering the V region than the opening patterns 33, 34, 35. The ease of entering the V region is proportional to the total opening time that the V opening / closing member 71 can open in one big hit game. "The ease of entering the V region is the same" is the case where the total opening time (hereinafter, also referred to as the total V opening time) that the V opening / closing member 71 can open in one big hit game is about the same. For example, the case where the total opening time of V differs within the range of ± 10 seconds is also included. For example, when the total V opening time in the jackpot game of "16RV planned passing jackpot" is 63.6 seconds, and the total V opening time in the jackpot game of "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" is 60 seconds. It can be said that the ease of entering the V region in these jackpot games is equivalent. Further, instead of this, "the ease of entering the V region is the same" means that even one game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 has the same average probability of entering the V region 39. As a case, for example, a case where the average probability differs within the range of ± 10% may be included. For example, by controlling the V opening / closing member 71 in the jackpot game of "16RV scheduled jackpot", the average probability that even one game ball that has won the first jackpot 30 will enter the V region 39 is 99%. In the jackpot game of "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", the V opening / closing member 71 is controlled so that even one game ball that has won the first prize opening 30 enters the V region 39. When the average probability of hitting a ball is 95%, it can be said that the ease of entering the V region in these jackpot games is equivalent.

[Modification 7]
In the first embodiment, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the opening / closing member 37 of the second winning opening 35 in the round game of 14R and 16R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening / closing member 37 of the second special winning opening 35 may be short-opened in another round game. For example, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are round games of less than 13R, and the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize opening 35 is short-opened. You may do so.

[Modification 8]
In the first embodiment, when the special figure stop symbol data is a jackpot of 14H to 16H, the variation effect from the first time to the predetermined time after the jackpot game is a low-accuracy time-saving effect despite the high-accuracy time-saving state. (Fig. 83 (D)). However, the variable effect performed in place of the high-accuracy time-saving effect is not limited to the low-accuracy time-saving effect. For example, when the game machine 1 is set to a jackpot type (referred to as "18H") in which the low probability non-time saving state is set after the big hit game without going through the low probability time saving state, the special figure stop symbol data 14H to In the high-accuracy time-saving state after the jackpot game of 16H, the low-accuracy non-time-saving effect may be performed instead of the high-accuracy time-saving effect. By doing so, the player cannot distinguish whether the jackpot type is "14H to 16H" or "18H" from the variation effect after the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Further, the game machine 1 may be configured to perform a low-accuracy non-time-saving effect in a high-accuracy non-time-saving state. For example, the game machine 1 has a jackpot type (referred to as "18H") that is in a low probability non-time saving state without going through a low probability non-time saving state after a jackpot game, and a jackpot type (called "18H") that is in a high probability non-time saving state after a jackpot game. 19H ”) is set, even if the low-accuracy non-time-saving effect is performed instead of the high-accuracy non-time-saving effect in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state after the jackpot game of the special figure stop symbol data 19H. Good. By doing so, the player cannot distinguish whether the jackpot type is "19H" or "18H" from the variation effect after the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

[Modification 9]
In the first embodiment, in the jackpot games of "16RV planned passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", when a specific round is reached, the first A control for long-opening the V opening / closing member 71 is executed based on the detection of two or six game balls winning in the first special winning opening 30 by the one large winning opening sensor 30a. Is not limited to this. Based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, 1, 3 to 5, 7 to 9) of game balls that have won a prize in the first prize opening 30 are detected by the first prize opening sensor 30a when a specific round is reached. , The control for long-opening the V opening / closing member 71 may be executed. Further, based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls that have won a prize in the first special winning opening 30 are detected by the first large winning opening sensor 30a when the specific round is reached, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the detection of the predetermined number. Therefore, the control for long-opening the V opening / closing member 71 may be executed.

[Modification 10]
In the first embodiment, the V passage suggestion effect (FIGS. 84 and 86) is executed during the round game of 16R, but the present invention is not limited to this. The V-passage suggestion effect may be executed during a round game different from the round game in which the entry of the game ball into the V area 39 is detected. It is a round game after the round game in which the entry is detected, and may be executed during the round game corresponding to a specific even-numbered round or odd-numbered round, or the entry of the gaming ball into the V region 39 is detected. It is a round game after the round game, and may be executed at the timing of notifying the player of predetermined game information. The predetermined game information is, for example, a jackpot payout information indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player by the jackpot game, and a hold in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in the special figure hold. Includes information representing the jackpot.

[Modification 11]
In the first embodiment, as shown in the round effect pattern determination process (FIG. 71), when the V pass flag is ON, the V pass suggestion effect is executed when the first specific round is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the V-passing flag is ON, the first specific round is reached, and when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls are won in the second major winning opening 35, the V-passing suggestion effect is executed. It may be. Further, when the V passage flag is ON, the V passage suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the first specific round was reached. Further, when the V passage flag is ON, the first specific round is entered, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is won in the second large winning opening 35, and a predetermined period (for example, 1) is obtained after the winning. When (seconds) have passed, the V passage suggestion effect may be executed.

[Modification 12]
In the first embodiment, in the "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled jackpot", the game ball is in the V region 39 during the jackpot game. By entering the ball, the game state shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state shifts to a game state other than the probabilistic state. May be. For example, a game ball may enter the V region 39 during the big hit game, so that the game state shifts to the time saving state after the big hit game.

[Modification 13]
In the first embodiment, when it is determined that the time saving effect change flag is ON in the time saving effect changing process (see FIG. 61) (step S4800: YES), that is, the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing schedule". After the jackpot game of "big hit" (special figure stop symbol data is 14H, 15H, 16H) is completed, a high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery is performed (step S4810). If the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery is won (step S4815: YES), the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4820). Without winning the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery, the 100th rotation of the time-saving (FIG. 66, step S5131: YES) is reached, and when the time-saving effect change flag is ON (step S5132: YES), the high-accuracy time-saving effect is produced. The inrush information is forcibly stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S5133). That is, high-accuracy time-saving production has been performed from the 100th rotation at the latest. In this case, in the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect executed at the 100th rotation, the display of the remaining time-saving virtual number of times shown in the logo RGO is displayed in the logo grasping effect, the logo grasping success effect, the logo hold effect, etc. shown in FIG. Although the configuration is such that "remaining 0 times", the present invention is not limited to this. By forcibly storing the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c before reaching the 100th rotation, the remaining virtual number of times of time reduction can be achieved in logo grasping effect, logo grasping success effect, logo hold effect, etc. Before the display becomes "0 times remaining", the high-accuracy time-saving rush confirmation effect may be executed. For example, by forcibly storing the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush information at the 90th rotation in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the high-accuracy time-saving rush is confirmed when the remaining virtual number of time reductions shown in the logo RGO is 10. You may try to perform the production. Further, instead of the configuration in which the high-accuracy time-shortening effect rush lottery is performed every variation (FIG. 61, step S4810), the number of rotations for performing the high-accuracy time-saving rushing confirmation effect may be determined in advance during the ending effect or the like. Further, instead of the configuration in which the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery is performed with each variation (step S4810), the configuration in which the high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery is performed every time the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number may be used. For example, when the predetermined number is 10 (times), a high-accuracy time-saving effect rush lottery is performed, such as the 10th rotation, the 20th rotation, the 30th rotation, and so on after the jackpot ends. ..

[Modification 14]
In the battle revival effect, the game machine 1 of the first embodiment shows that when the round game becomes 15R (15 rounds) after the 13R effect (scene suggesting defeat) as shown in FIG. 86 (C). As shown in 86 (D), the game continuation suggestion image FKT suggesting that the jackpot game is still continuing is displayed, and the 15R effect showing the scene suggesting that the ally character CRA has stood up and revived is executed. After that, when the round game is 16R (16 rounds) and the V passage flag is OFF, 16R effect B (V non-passage suggestion effect) is executed as shown in FIG. 86 (F). In this case, the player is discouraged by the execution of the 16R effect B (V non-passage suggestion effect) even though the 15R effect indicating the scene suggesting that the ally character CRA has stood up and revived has been executed. There is a risk. Therefore, when the round game is 15R (15th round) and the V passage flag is OFF, the 15R effect (display of the game continuation suggestion image FKT and the ally character CRA are raised and revived) shown in FIG. 86 (D). It is also possible to execute the same effect as the 13R effect (the scene suggesting defeat) without executing the effect indicating the scene suggesting that. In this case, the 16R effect B shown in FIG. 86 (F) may or may not be executed.

[Modification 15]
In the second embodiment, it has been described that the same fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 18) is referred to during the low-accuracy time-saving effect and the high-accuracy time-saving effect. However, the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to during the low-accuracy time-saving effect and the high-accuracy time-saving effect may be different. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make the high-accuracy time-saving effect longer than the low-accuracy time-saving effect to perform a more dynamic effect.

[Modification 16]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine.

[Modification 17]
The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine. Further, two or more modified examples may be combined among the plurality of modified examples described above. Further, the game machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-mentioned display effect may be executed on the sub-display device.

[Modification 18]
The configuration of the game machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even if the order or value is other than the scope of the present invention. be able to. Further, the display effect illustrated in the above embodiment is merely an example, and other display effects can be adopted.

[Embodiment]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A-1]
Based on the ball entry detection means (20a, 21a) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry ports (20, 21) provided in the game area (3) and the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection means. A determination means (81) for determining whether or not the game is correct, a first winning opening (30) provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member (32) provided in the game area and hindering or allowing acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation. The first winning detection means (30a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and the first winning detecting means located downstream of the first winning detecting means and detecting the winning. The first prize is obtained by the specific area (39) in which the game ball can be entered, the specific area entry detection means (39a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the opening / closing operation. A specific area opening / closing member (71) that hinders or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth to enter the specific area, and a winning opening that is provided in the game area and is different from the first winning opening. A second winning opening (35) having a second opening / closing member (37) that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area. The operation of the opening / closing member can be controlled, and when the winning / failing determination by the determination means determines that the winning / failing member is won, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member are opened and closed. The winning game is executed, and in the winning game, the first opening and closing is performed so that the number of game balls that can be won in the first winning opening is larger than the number of game balls that can be won in the second winning opening. The hit game executing means (81) that controls the member and the second opening / closing member (FIG. 20), the game state after the hit game, the first game state (low probability state), and the determination means. It is possible to execute one of a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the winning / failing determination is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the specific Based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the specific area by the area entry detection means, the gaming state control means (which can set the gaming state after the hit game to the second gaming state). 81) and a gaming machine (1).

◇ [Aspect A-2]
In the winning game, the winning game executing means (81) allows the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening during the period during which the winning of the game ball is allowed to the first winning opening. The gaming machine according to aspect A-1, wherein the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are controlled (FIG. 20) so as to be longer than the period of time.

◇ [Aspect A-3]
The hit game executing means (81) includes a first hit game (13RV scheduled jackpot, latent probability variation jackpot) and a second hit game (13RV non-passing jackpot, normal jackpot) different from the first hit game. ) And one of a plurality of types of winning games can be executed. In the first winning game, the first opening / closing pattern (FIG. 20: opening pattern 22) is used. The member and the second opening / closing member are controlled, and in the second hit game, the second opening pattern (FIG. 20: opening pattern 22), which is an opening pattern equivalent to the first opening pattern, is used. A first specification in which the opening / closing member of 1 and the second opening / closing member are controlled, and in the first hit game, the game ball winning in the first winning opening can enter the specific area. The first ball entry control for controlling the specific region opening / closing member is executed in the region opening pattern (FIG. 21: opening patterns 33, 34, 35), and in the second winning game, the first winning opening is won. A second specific area opening / closing member is controlled by a second specific area opening pattern (FIG. 21: opening pattern 36) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area than the first specific area opening pattern. 2. The ball entry control is executed, and in the game state control means, the first ball entry control is executed in the first hit game by the hit game execution means, and the specific area entry detection means specifies the ball entry control. Based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the region, the game state after the first hit game can be set to the second game state (high probability state), and the hit game can be set. Based on the fact that the second ball entry control is executed in the second hit game by the executing means and the entry of the game ball into the specific area is not detected by the specific area entry detection means. The gaming machine according to aspect A-1 or aspect A-2, wherein the gaming state after the first hit game can be set to the first gaming state (low probability state).

◇ [Aspect A-4]
The hit game executing means (81), as one of the plurality of types of hit games, is a third hit game (scheduled to pass 16 RV) different from the first hit game and the second hit game. (Big hit, probability variation big hit) can be executed, and in the third hit game, the first open pattern and the third open pattern different from the second open pattern (FIG. 20: open pattern 21) can be used. The first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are controlled, and the ball entering the specific area of the game ball winning the first winning opening opens / closes the specific area in the second specific area opening pattern. The gaming machine according to aspect A-3, wherein the specific region opening / closing member is controlled so as to be easier than when the member is controlled (FIG. 21: opening pattern 31).

◇ [Aspect A-5]
The winning game executing means (81) has the first winning game so that the game ball can be won in both the first winning opening and the second winning opening in the third winning game. By controlling the opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member (FIG. 20: opening pattern 21), it is possible to win a game ball into the first winning opening in the first hit game and the second hit game. The first opening / closing member is controlled so as to be, and the second opening / closing member is controlled so that the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening becomes more difficult than the third hit game (FIG. 20: The gaming machine according to aspect A-4, which comprises an open pattern 22).

◇ [Aspect A-6]
Based on the type of the hit game executed by the hit game executing means and the game state after the hit game executed by the game state control means, a specific effect after the hit game (FIGS. 87, 88). ) Is an effect control means (91) capable of executing the third hit game (16 RV passing planned jackpot) by the hit game execution means, and after the third hit game by the game state control means. When the game state of is set to the second game state (high probability state), the first effect (FIG. 88: high-probability time-saving effect) is executed after the third hit game, and the hit game execution means is used. The second hit game (13RV non-passing scheduled big hit, normal big hit) is executed, and the game state after the second hit game is set to the first game state (low probability state) by the game state control means. At that time, after the second hit game, a second effect (FIG. 87: low probability time saving effect) different from the first effect is executed, and the first hit game (scheduled to pass 13 RV) is executed by the hit game execution means. When the jackpot (big hit, latent probability variation jackpot) is executed and the gaming state after the first hit game is set to the second gaming state (high probability state) by the gaming state control means, the gaming state is the second. A-4 or the aspect A-4, characterized in that the effect control means (91) for executing the second effect (FIG. 87: low probability time saving effect) is provided after the first hit game regardless of the game state. The gaming machine according to aspect A-5.

◇ [Aspect A-7]
The hit game executing means (81) allows the game balls to enter the specific area when the first winning detecting means detects a predetermined number of winning games (FIG. 39). The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A-1 to A-6, which comprises controlling a specific region opening / closing member.

◇ [Aspect A-8]
A notification means (91) capable of executing notification of game information related to a game is provided, and the winning game executing means (81) has the first winning opening or the second winning opening in one winning game. It is possible to execute a round game in which one of the above is opened a plurality of times, and the notification means is such that the game ball is detected in the round game in which the specific area entry detection means detects the entry of the game ball into the specific area. After the round game in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected without performing the entry suggestion notification (FIGS. 84 and 86: V passage suggestion effect) suggesting that the ball has entered the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A-1 to A-7, characterized in that the ball entry suggestion notification is executed in the round game of the above.

◇ [Aspect A-9]
The second winning detection means (35a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening is provided, and the notification means (91) is the second winning opening of the second winning opening by the winning game executing means. In the round game in which the opening / closing member of 2 is controlled to be open, the ball entry suggestion notification (FIGS. 84 and 86: V passage suggestion effect) is executed based on the detection of the prize by the second prize detection means. The gaming machine according to the feature A-8.

◇ [Aspect A-10]
In the round game in which the first winning opening is opened, the notification unit determines the number of game balls that have won the first winning opening and the number of gaming balls that are discharged from the first winning opening. When a mismatch occurs, a mismatch notification suggesting the occurrence of the mismatch is performed (FIG. 41), and when the specific area opening / closing member is opened in the round game in which the mismatch occurs, the specific area opening / closing member is opened. The gaming machine according to the aspect A-8 or the aspect A-9, characterized in that the retry operation of the above is performed (FIG. 41).

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may have the following aspects.
[Aspect B-1]
Based on the ball entry detection means (20a, 21a) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry ports (20, 21) provided in the game area (3) and the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection means. A determination means (81) for determining whether or not the game is correct, a first winning opening (30) provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member (32) provided in the game area and hindering or allowing acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation. The first winning detection means (30a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and the first winning detecting means located downstream of the first winning detecting means and detecting the winning. The first prize is obtained by the specific area (39) in which the game ball can be entered, the specific area entry detection means (39a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the opening / closing operation. A specific area opening / closing member (71) that hinders or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth to enter the specific area, and a winning opening that is provided in the game area and is different from the first winning opening. A second winning opening (35) having a second opening / closing member (37) that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area. The operation of the opening / closing member can be controlled, and when the winning / failing determination by the determination means determines that the winning / failing member is won, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member are opened and closed. The winning game is executed, and in the winning game, the first opening and closing is performed so that the number of game balls that can be won in the first winning opening is larger than the number of game balls that can be won in the second winning opening. The hit game executing means (81) that controls the member and the second opening / closing member (FIG. 20), the game state after the hit game, the first game state (low probability state), and the determination means. It is possible to execute one of a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the winning / failing determination is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the specific Based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the specific area by the area entry detection means, the gaming state control means (which can set the gaming state after the hit game to the second gaming state). 81), a specific effect after the hit game, based on the type of the hit game executed by the hit game execution means and the game state after the hit game executed by the game state control means (FIG. 87, FIG. 88) is provided with an effect control means (91) capable of executing the effect control means, and the effect control means is the hit play. The first hit game (16 RV passing jackpot) is executed by the technique executing means, and the game state after the first hit game is set to the second game state (high probability state) by the game state control means. Occasionally, the first effect (FIG. 88: high-probability time-saving effect) is executed after the first hit game, and the second hit game (13RV non-passing scheduled jackpot, normal jackpot) is executed by the hit game execution means. Then, when the gaming state after the second hit game is set to the first game state (low probability state) by the game state control means, it is different from the first effect after the second hit game. The second effect (FIG. 87: low probability time saving effect) is executed, the third hit game (13 RV passing jackpot, latent probability variable jackpot) is executed by the hit game execution means, and the game state control means causes the first hit game. When the gaming state after the winning game of 3 is the second gaming state (high probability state), the second gaming state is after the third winning game, even though the gaming state is the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect (Fig. 87: low-probability time-saving effect).

[Aspect C-1]
Based on the ball entry detection means (20a, 21a) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry ports (20, 21) provided in the game area (3) and the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection means. A determination means (81) for determining whether or not the game is correct, a first winning opening (30) provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member (32) provided in the game area and hindering or allowing acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation. The first winning detection means (30a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and the first winning detecting means located downstream of the first winning detecting means and detecting the winning. The first prize is obtained by the specific area (39) in which the game ball can be entered, the specific area entry detection means (39a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the opening / closing operation. A specific area opening / closing member (71) that hinders or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth to enter the specific area, and a winning opening that is provided in the game area and is different from the first winning opening. A second winning opening (35) having a second opening / closing member (37) that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area. The operation of the opening / closing member can be controlled, and when the winning / failing determination by the determination means determines that the winning / failing member is won, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member are opened and closed. The period during which the winning game is executed and the winning game is allowed to win the first winning opening is longer than the period during which the winning game is allowed to enter the second winning opening. The hit game executing means (81) that controls the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member (FIG. 20) so as to be longer, and the game state after the hit game, which is the first gaming state. One of a plurality of gaming states including (low probability state) and a second gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the winning / failing determination by the determining means is higher than that of the first gaming state. Based on the fact that the game state can be executed and the entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected by the specific area entry detection means, the gaming state after the hit game is referred to as the second gaming state. A gaming machine (1) comprising a gaming state control means (81) capable of playing the game.

[Aspect D-1]
Based on the ball entry detection means (20a, 21a) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry ports (20, 21) provided in the game area (3) and the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection means. A determination means (81) for determining whether or not the game is correct, a first winning opening (30) provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member (32) provided in the game area and hindering or allowing acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation. The first winning detection means (30a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and the first winning detecting means located downstream of the first winning detecting means and detecting the winning. The first prize is obtained by the specific area (39) in which the game ball can be entered, the specific area entry detection means (39a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the opening / closing operation. A specific area opening / closing member (71) that hinders or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth to enter the specific area, and a winning opening that is provided in the game area and is different from the first winning opening. A second winning opening (35) having a second opening / closing member (37) that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area. The operation of the opening / closing member can be controlled, and when the winning / failing determination by the determination means determines that the winning / failing member is won, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member are opened and closed. The winning game is executed, and in the winning game, the first opening and closing is performed so that the number of game balls that can be won in the first winning opening is larger than the number of game balls that can be won in the second winning opening. The hit game executing means (81) that controls the member and the second opening / closing member (FIG. 20), the game state after the hit game, the first game state (low probability state), and the determination means. It is possible to execute one of a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the winning / failing determination is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the specific Based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the specific area by the area entry detection means, the gaming state control means (which can set the gaming state after the hit game to the second gaming state). 81) and a notification means (91) capable of executing notification of game information related to the game, and the winning game executing means (81) is the first winning opening in one winning game. Alternatively, a round game in which either one of the second winning openings is opened can be executed a plurality of times, and the notification means is the specific area entry inspection. In a round game in which the exiting means detects the entry of the game ball into the specific area, the ball entry suggestion notification suggesting that the game ball has entered the specific area (FIGS. 84 and 86: V passage suggestion effect). (1) The gaming machine (1), characterized in that the ball entry suggestion notification is executed in a round game after the round game in which the ball entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected.

[Aspect F-1]
Based on the ball entry detection means (20a, 21a) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry ports (20, 21) provided in the game area (3) and the ball entry detection by the ball entry detection means. A determination means (81) for determining whether or not the game is correct, a first winning opening (30) provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member (32) provided in the game area and hindering or allowing acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation. The first winning detection means (30a) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and the first winning detecting means located downstream of the first winning detecting means and detecting the winning. The first prize is obtained by the specific area (39) in which the game ball can be entered, the specific area entry detection means (39a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the opening / closing operation. A specific area opening / closing member (71) that hinders or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth to enter the specific area, and a winning opening that is provided in the game area and is different from the first winning opening. A second winning opening (35) having a second opening / closing member (37) that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area. The operation of the opening / closing member can be controlled, and when the winning / failing determination by the determination means determines that the winning / failing member is won, the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member are opened and closed. The winning game is executed, and in the winning game, the first opening and closing is performed so that the number of game balls that can be won in the first winning opening is larger than the number of game balls that can be won in the second winning opening. The member and the second opening / closing member are controlled (FIG. 20), and when the first winning detection means detects a predetermined number of winning games, the game balls are allowed to enter the specific area (FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 39), the hit game executing means (81) for controlling the specific area opening / closing member, and
In the gaming state after the hit game, the first gaming state (low probability state) and the second gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the winning / failing determination by the determining means is higher than that of the first gaming state. (Probability state) and one of a plurality of gaming states including the game state can be executed, and based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the specific area by the specific area entry detection means. A gaming machine (1), comprising: a gaming state control means (81) capable of setting the gaming state after the hit game to the second gaming state.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1,1A, 1B ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 20 ... 1st start port (ball entry port)
20a ... First start port sensor (ball entry detection means)
21 ... 2nd start port (ball entry port)
21a ... Second start port sensor (ball entry detection means)
30 ... 1st prize opening (1st prize opening)
30a ... 1st prize opening sensor (1st prize detection means)
32 ... Opening / closing member (first opening / closing member)
35 ... 2nd prize opening (2nd prize opening)
35a ... Second prize opening sensor (second prize detection means)
37 ... Opening / closing member (second opening / closing member)
39 ... V region (specific region)
39a ... V area sensor (specific area ball entry detection means)
71 ... V opening / closing member (specific area opening / closing member)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer

Claims (1)

An entry detection means for detecting the entry of a game ball into the entry port provided in the game area, and a ball entry detection means.
A determination means that makes a hit / fail determination based on the entry detection by the entry detection means,
A first winning opening provided in the game area and having a first opening / closing member that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by an opening / closing operation.
The first winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening, and
A specific area located downstream of the first winning detection means and capable of entering a game ball detected by the first winning detecting means.
A specific area entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area, and
A specific area opening / closing member that prevents or allows a game ball that has won a prize in the first winning opening to enter the specific area by the opening / closing operation.
A second winning opening provided in the game area, which is different from the first winning opening and has a second opening / closing member that hinders or allows the acceptance of the game ball by the opening / closing operation.
A second winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening, and
The operation of the first opening / closing member, the second opening / closing member, and the specific area opening / closing member can be controlled, and when the winning / failing determination by the determining means determines that the first opening / closing member has been won. And a hit game executing means capable of executing a hit game for opening and closing the second opening / closing member and the specific area opening / closing member.
A gaming state after game per above, the first game condition, being capable of performing one game state of the plurality of game states including a second game state, and the specific region ball entrance detection A game state control means capable of setting the game state after the hit game to the second game state based on the detection of the game ball entering the specific area by the means.
It is equipped with a notification means capable of executing notification of game information related to the game.
The hit game execution means
In one hit game, a round game in which either the first winning opening or the second winning opening is opened can be executed a plurality of times.
The notification means is
In the round game in which the specific area entry detection means detects the entry of the game ball into the specific area, the ball entry suggestion notification suggesting that the game ball has entered the specific area is not performed.
It is a round game after the round game in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected, and the second opening / closing member of the second winning opening is controlled to be opened by the winning game executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that, in a round game, the second winning detection means executes the winning suggestion notification based on the detection of winning .